2016 Jeep Compass Owner's Manual

Compass

OWNER’S MANUAL

2016

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA

US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA

Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-

portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are

slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design

and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-

ments to its products without imposing any obligation

upon itself to install them on products previously manu-

factured.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE .................................103

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................211

STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................329

WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................447

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................487

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................543

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................551

INDEX .....................................................................563

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

䡵 INTRODUCTION ........................4

䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING ...................4

䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............5

䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............7

䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........7

䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....8

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC

vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-

ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials

that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-

tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various

customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to

read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-

tions and recommendations in this manual will help

assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it

should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-

ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized

dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained

technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about

your satisfaction.

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate

than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher

ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than

many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing

better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven

in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.

Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is

out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles

may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other

unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle

4 INTRODUCTION

control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result

in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal

injury. Drive carefully.

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-

vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the

U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing

seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or

more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by

two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section

contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the

items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and

illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual

contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout

this Owner’s Manual:

Rollover Warning Label

INTRODUCTION 5

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against

operating procedures that could result in a collision,

bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS

against procedures that could result in damage to your

vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,

you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-

ings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the

left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through

the windshield. This number also is stamped into the

right front body, on the right front seat crossmember

under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.

Vehicle Identification Number

INTRODUCTION 7

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and

may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or

death.

Right Front Body VIN Location

8 INTRODUCTION

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12

▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................12

▫ Locking Doors With A Key................14

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................14

䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................15

▫ Replacement Keys .....................16

▫ Customer Key Programming ..............17

▫ General Information ....................18

䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —

IF EQUIPPED ..........................18

▫ To Arm The System ....................19

▫ Rearming The System ...................19

▫ To Disarm The System ...................19

▫ Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override ......20

䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —

IF EQUIPPED ..........................20

▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........21

▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First

Press...............................21

▫ Illuminated Approach — If Equipped ........22

▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............22

▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock .........22

▫ Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock . . .23

▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................24

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters........25

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........25

▫ General Information ....................26

䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED ..........................26

▫ How To Use Remote Start ................27

▫ Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped .....27

▫ To Enter Remote Start ...................28

▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle ..............................29

▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The

Vehicle ..............................29

䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................29

▫ Manual Door Locks .....................29

▫ Power Door Locks .....................31

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —

Rear Doors ..........................34

䡵 POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ........35

▫ Power Window Switches .................35

▫ Auto-Down ..........................37

▫ Window Lockout Switch .................37

䡵 LIFTGATE ............................38

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........40

▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............40

▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................42

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........60

▫ Child Restraints .......................75

▫ Transporting Pets ......................96

䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....96

䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................97

▫ Transporting Passengers..................97

▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................98

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle .............................99

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle .........................101

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has

the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These

numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your

authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a

safe place.

Ignition Key Removal

1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an

automatic transmission).

2. Place the ignition in the ACC (Accessory) position.

3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to

the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.

Vehicle Key

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the

shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tem-

porarily in the ignition switch cylinder. If this occurs,

place the shift lever in PARK, rotate the key clockwise

slightly, and then remove the key as described above. If a

malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the

ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is

inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but

the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic

transmission into PARK or the manual transmis-

sion into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the park-

ing brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob

from the ignition and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

Ignition Switch Positions

1 — LOCK

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON/RUN

4 — START

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Locking Doors With A Key

You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the

door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn

the key to the left. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition

and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC sounds a

signal to remind you to remove the key.

NOTE: With the driver’s door open and the key in the

ignition, the power door locks will not lock, and Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-

ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded

electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized

vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-

grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate

the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two

seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the

engine.

NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also

considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the

ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

During normal operation, after turning on the ignition

switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three

seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the

bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the

electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light

begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that

someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.

Either of these conditions will result in the engine being

shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10

seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-

ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon

as possible by an authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-

ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.

Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting

problems and loss of security protection.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have

been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle

electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.

Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot

be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized

dealer or by following the customer key programming

procedure. This procedure consists of programming a

blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one

that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-

tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an

authorized dealer.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Customer Key Programming

If you have two valid Sentry Keys, you can program new

Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following

procedure:

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to

match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.

2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn

the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at

least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.

Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position

and remove the first key.

3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position

within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will

sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will

begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the second key.

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch. Turn

the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within 60

seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.

In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flash-

ing. To indicate that programming is complete, the

Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three

seconds and then turn off.

The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Remote Key-

less Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed

during this procedure.

Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you

do not have a programmed Sentry Key, contact your

authorized dealer for details.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized

dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-

tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from

starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be

reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an

authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro-

grammed.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,

and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.

When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for

door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm

provides both audio and visual signals, the horn will

sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals

will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance

is still present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors,

ignition) after three minutes, the parking lights and tail

lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Arm The System

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out

of the vehicle.

2. Lock the door using either the power door LOCK

switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter

and close all doors.

3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster

will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds. This

shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming.

During this period, if a door is opened, the ignition

switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the power door locks

are unlocked in any manner, the Vehicle Security

Alarm will automatically disarm. After approximately

16 seconds, the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly.

This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully

armed.

Rearming The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to

disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the

horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals

after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will

rearm itself.

To Disarm The System

Push UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter, or insert the key

into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to

the ON/RUN position.

If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in

your absence, the horn will sound three times, and

exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the

doors. Check the vehicle for tampering. The Vehicle

Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle.

However, you can create conditions where the Vehicle

Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in

the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter,

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed (after 16

seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit, the

alarm will sound. If this occurs, push the UNLOCK

button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle

Security Alarm.

Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the

doors using the manual door lock plunger.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF

EQUIPPED

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and

liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to

approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter

does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the

system.

NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked

with metal objects.

Three Button RKE Transmitter

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE

transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice

within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The

turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock

signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either

the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings

(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-

ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following steps:

1. Push and hold the LOCK button on a programmed

RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer

than 10 seconds. Then, push and hold the UN-

LOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.

2. Release both buttons at the same time.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by

pushing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE

transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and the key removed.

4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature

to its previous setting.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter

while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle

Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security

Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the

UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security

Alarm.

Illuminated Approach — If Equipped

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds

when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.

The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles

equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-

strument Panel” for further information.

NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the

dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme

downward position), unless the overhead map/reading

lights are turned on manually.

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights

will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the

signal.

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors

are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be

turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,

proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-

mation.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following steps:

1. Push the LOCK button on a programmed RKE

transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than

10 seconds. Then, push the PANIC button while

still holding the LOCK button.

2. Release both buttons at the same time.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by

pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter

with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and

the key removed.

4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature

to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter

while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle

Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security

Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the

UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security

Alarm.

Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when

the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-

ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change

the current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-

mation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following steps:

1. Push and hold the UNLOCK button on a pro-

grammed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but

no longer than 10 seconds. Then, push and hold the

LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK

button.

2. Release both buttons at the same time.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by

pushing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE

transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and the key removed.

4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature

to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter

while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle

Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security

Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the

UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security

Alarm.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, push and

hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at

least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,

the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will

pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless

you turn it off by pushing the PANIC button a second

time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pushing

the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move

closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of

the system.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Things To Know Before Start-

ing” for further information.

If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,

contact your authorized dealer for details.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-

ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,

remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons

facing down, use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the

two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure

not to damage the elastomer seal during removal.

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the

new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause

battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it

with rubbing alcohol.

Separating Case Halves

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two

halves together.

NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,

reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-

niently from outside the vehicle while still

maintaining security. The system has a range of

approximately 300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between the

vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range.

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic

transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may

reduce this range.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the

engine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

• Ignition key removed from ignition switch

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

• RKE PANIC button not pushed

• System not disabled from previous remote start event

• Vehicle Security Alarm not active

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-

oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon

Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-

jury or death when inhaled.

• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters

away from children. Operation of the Remote Start

System, windows, door locks or other controls

could cause serious injury or death.

Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped

The following messages will display in the EVIC if the

vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-

turely:

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault

The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned

to the ON/RUN position.

To Enter Remote Start

Push and release the REMOTE START button

on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-

onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking

lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice

(if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the

vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a

15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during

Remote Start mode.

• For security, power window and power sunroof op-

eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is

in the Remote Start mode.

• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start

will automatically lock the doors.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two

15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,

the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN

position before you can repeat the start sequence for a

third cycle.

Remote Start will also cancel if any of the following

occur:

• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Any engine warning lamps come on.

• Low Fuel Light turns on.

• The hood is opened.

• The hazard switch is pushed.

• The transmission is moved out of PARK.

• The brake pedal is pushed.

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle

Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or

allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system

will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START

button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote

Start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release

the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock

the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if

equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN

position in order to drive the vehicle.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

Use the manual door lock knob to lock the doors from

inside the vehicle. If the lock knob is down when the door

is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not

inside the vehicle before closing the door.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of an

collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as

well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Manual Door Lock Knob

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is located on the driver’s and

front passenger’s door panel. Push this switch to lock or

unlock the doors and liftgate.

NOTE: To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle,

the power door lock switch will not operate when the key

is in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime

will sound as a reminder to remove the key.

Driver Power Door Lock Switch

1 — Unlock

2 — Lock

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

Auto Lock Doors — If Equipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.

When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically

when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).

Auto Lock Doors Programming

The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or

disabled as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal

Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-

mation.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following procedure:

1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition

switch.

2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch be-

tween LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to

LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK position

(do not start the engine).

3. Within 30 seconds, push the power door LOCK

switch to lock the doors.

4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the

programming.

5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature

to its previous setting.

NOTE:

• If you do not hear the chime, it means that the system

did not enter the programming mode and you will

need to repeat the procedure.

• Use the Automatic Door Lock feature in accordance

with local laws.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

The doors will unlock automatically if:

• The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-

abled.

• The transmission was in gear, and the vehicle speed

returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).

• The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.

• The driver’s door is opened.

• The doors were not previously unlocked.

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming

The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be

enabled or disabled as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If

Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-

strument Panel” for further information.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following procedure:

1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.

2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch be-

tween LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to

LOCK five times, ending up in the ON/RUN

position (do not start the engine).

3. Within 30 seconds, push the power door UNLOCK

switch to unlock the doors.

4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the

programming.

5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature

to its previous setting.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

NOTE:

• If you do not hear the chime, it means that the system

did not enter the programming mode and you will

need to repeat the procedure.

• Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in

accordance with local laws.

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear

Doors

To provide a safer environment for small children riding

in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with

Child-Protection Door Lock system.

To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection

Door Lock System

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and

rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened

from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are

engaged.

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,

move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the

window, and open the door with the outside door

handle.

POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED

Power Window Switches

The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel

control all the door windows. There are single window

controls on each passenger door trim panel, which oper-

ate the passenger door windows. The window controls

will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN

or ACC position.

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

NOTE:

• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), the power window

switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Open-

ing either front door will cancel this feature.

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power

window switches will remain active for up to 10

minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the

LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel

this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do

not let children play with power windows. Do not

leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a

location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-

larly unattended children, can become entrapped by

the windows while operating the power window

switches. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Auto-Down

The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down

feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,

release, and the window will go down automatically. To

cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in

either the up or down direction and release the switch.

Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows

you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger

doors. To disable the window controls on the rear pas-

senger doors, push the window LOCKOUT switch. To

enable the rear window controls, push the window

LOCKOUT switch a second time.

Power Window Switch Location

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

LIFTGATE

NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also

used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.

To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and

turn it to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate

can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter or by activating the power door lock

switches located on the front doors. The central locking/

unlocking feature (if equipped) can also be activated

from the liftgate key cylinder.

Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed

without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the

liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid

motion.

Window Lockout Switch

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• In the event of a power malfunction, or the RKE

transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the

liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right (manual lock

models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the lift-

gate open with one fluid motion.

• Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism,

the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a

snap-in cap that provides access to release the latch in

the event of an electrical system malfunction.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous

exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your

passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep

the liftgate closed when you are operating the

vehicle.

• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,

make sure that all windows are closed, and the

climate control blower switch is set at high speed.

Do not use the recirculation mode.

Liftgate Handle Location

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.

However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-

ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when

opening the liftgate in cold weather.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Supplemental Active Head Restraints

• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the

risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride

buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing

child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as possible and use the

proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle

seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should

be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-

dren who do not use child restraints or belt-

positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled

up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind

them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it

properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and

shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front

Air Bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your

vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the

side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space

between occupants and the door and occupants could

be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be

modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact

the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided

under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver

and could cause a collision that includes you. This can

happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

be belted at all times.

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver

and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle

their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-

ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN

position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first

turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermit-

tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or

outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard

front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the

ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN

position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and

remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buck-

led. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not

active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccu-

pied.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the

vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range

and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-

buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by

blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an

intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence

has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain

on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning

sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the

driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat

belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-

pants to buckle their seat belts.

Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,

the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat

belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active

when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy

object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the

seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that

pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet

harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,

and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-

rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-

vating BeltAlert.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver

or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-

board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the

Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until

the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts

are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with

lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very

sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-

der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under

normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt

will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the

vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belt even though you have

air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-

led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or

other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the

vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your

vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

(Continued)

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your

injuries in a collision much worse. You might

suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out

of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear

your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers

safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in a collision, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their size.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at

the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your

abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat

belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In

a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the

seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If

you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take

it to your authorized dealer immediately and have

it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle

will not protect you properly. The lap portion could

ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-

nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the

buckle nearest you.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

WARNING! (Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far

forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear

your seat belt snugly.

•

A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the

vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck

injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause

internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that

your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not

wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect

the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-

placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify

the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be

replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front

seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles

equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and

pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go

around your lap.

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low

across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove

slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch

plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces

the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and

chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-

able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the

buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its

stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate

down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract

fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/

shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the

anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch

plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180

degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above

the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of

the latch plate.

Positioning The Lap Belt

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the

shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to

position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or

squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,

and move it up or down to the position that serves you

best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,

and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the

shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you

release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down

to make sure that it is locked in position.

Adjustable Anchorage

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is

equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows

the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward

position without pushing or squeezing the release but-

ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull

downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is

locked into position.

Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating

Instructions

The second row center seat belt features a seat belt with

a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt

to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.

The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be

stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for

added convenience to open up utilization of the storage

areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occu-

pied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate

from its stowed position in the right rear side trim

panel.

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over

the seat.

Mini-Latch Stowage

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head

restraint.

4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the

mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a

“click.”

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go

around your lap.

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low

across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove

slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the

lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding

under the seat belt in a collision.

8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-

tor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.

9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the

buckle.

Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-

buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into

the black button on the top of the mini-buckle. The

seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed

position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the

webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert

the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its

stowed position.

Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not

properly connected when the seat belt is used by an

occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide

proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury

in a collision.

• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-

buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding

procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-

buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the

mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when

the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper

shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest

position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a

Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used

only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the

Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-

pant, it must be removed.

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically

required in order to properly fit the original seat

belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender

if, when worn, the distance between the front edge

of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of

the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.

• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can

increase the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the

lap belt is not long enough and only use in the

recommended seating positions. Remove and store

the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including

pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an

accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child

if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen

and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the

shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.

Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under

the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning

devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat

belt in the event of a collision. These devices may

improve the performance of the seat belt by removing

slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners

work for all size occupants, including those in child

restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat

belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be

worn snugly and positioned properly.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-

sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or

a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy

Management feature in the front seating positions that

may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of

a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly

that is designed to release webbing in a controlled

manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.

For additional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

Restraints” section of this manual. The table below

defines the type of feature for each seating position.

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the

seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap

around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate

the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking

sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to

retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out

only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably

wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-

matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to

remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic

Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a

seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.

Children 12 years old and under should always be

properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until

the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,

you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat

belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it

to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)

locking mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the

switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-

ture or any other seat belt function is not working

properly when checked according to the proce-

dures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could

increase the risk of injury in collisions.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain

occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children

who are using booster seats. The locked mode is

only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing

child restraints that have a harness for restraining

the child.

Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)

These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-

nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily

identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-

tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split

in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and

trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines

whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require

the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear

impact requires deployment, both the driver and front

passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half

of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap

between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.

This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the

extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in

certain types of rear impacts.

NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may

not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.

However if during a front impact, a secondary rear

impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-

ity and type of the impact.

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components

1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)

2 — Seatback

3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)

4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver, should not

operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their proper positions

in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a collision.

• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head

Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable

DVD players. These items may interfere with the

operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event

of a collision and could result in serious injury or

death.

• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are

struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose

cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-

tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-

straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this

warning could cause personal injury if the Active

Head Restraint is deployed.

NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and

positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active

Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle.”

Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)

If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a

collision, the front half of the head restraint will be

extended forward and separated from the rear half of the

head restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle

after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must

be reset into the original position to best protect the

occupant for all types of collisions. An authorized FCA

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and

front passenger’s seat before driving. Personally attempt-

ing to reset the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs

that could impair their function.

WARNING!

Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all

types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an

authorized dealer immediately.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Air Bag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag

system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags

AHR In Reset Position

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Seat Track Position Sensors

Advanced Front Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the

driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat

belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air

Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the

instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The

words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on

the air bag covers.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster

Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags

2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster

3— Driver Knee Impact Bolster

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment

could cause serious injury, including death. Air

bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably

extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage

driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides

output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),

which may receive information from the front impact

sensors or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an

impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy

output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy

output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front

passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether

the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat

belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air

bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,

because any such objects could cause harm if the

vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the

air bags to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag

covers or attempt to open them manually. You may

damage the air bags and you could be injured

because the air bags may no longer be functional.

The protective covers for the air bag cushions are

designed to open only when the air bags are

inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-

ways wear your seat belts even though you have air

bags.

Advanced Front Air Bag Operation

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk

of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may produce substantial

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of

impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes

with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a

severe initial deceleration.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration

over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are

not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should

have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-

sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,

away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large

quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right

side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the

way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced

Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while

helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the

driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-

pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front

Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact

bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact

bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band

radios, etc.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):

Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-

BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury

during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover

events, in addition to the injury reduction potential

provided by the seat belts and body structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-

board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB

deploys through the seat seam into the space between the

occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high

speed and with such a high force that it could injure

occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are

positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children

are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air

bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects

between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance

could be adversely affected and/or objects could be

pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim

covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or

“AIRBAG.”

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries

to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side

impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the

injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and

body structure.

The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-

dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the

trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs

inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are

not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned

in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an

even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or

complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side

windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

•

Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high

enough to block the deployment of the SABICs.

The trim covering above the side windows where

the SABIC and its deployment path are located

should remain free from any obstructions.

• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not

install any accessory items in your vehicle which

could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket

sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that

require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)

for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into

the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to

activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover

events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-

termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in

a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,

based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint

system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are

up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously

injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should

never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or

area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an

infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are

necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also

help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air

Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,

occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit

upright with their backs against the seats. Children must

be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat

that is appropriate for the size of the child.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean

against the door or window. Sit upright in the

center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-

ment could cause you to be severely injured or

killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air

Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t

deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even

though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Side Impacts

In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in

determining the appropriate response to impact events.

The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on

the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require

Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the

Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact

deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side

impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,

including some collisions at certain angles, or some side

collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger

compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during

angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced

Front Air Bags deploy.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover

events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of

the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-

priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.

The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover

event may be in progress and whether deployment is

appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the

seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A

faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-

sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the

vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the

seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,

on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a

near rollover event.

If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all

collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with

the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any

or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions

and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags

deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-

tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a

carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by

contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and

normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed

significantly within a few days, or if you have any

blistering, see your doctor immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air

bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the

skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye

irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation

continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on

your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-

structions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-

ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air

bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot

protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,

seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor

assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-

diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller

System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,

but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an

authorized dealer immediately.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network

remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending

on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine

whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or

until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard

lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light

button.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as

the battery has power.

• Unlock the power door locks.

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset

Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System

functions after an event, the ignition switch must be

changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition

OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the

engine compartment and on the ground near the engine

compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system

and starting the engine.

Air Bag Warning Light

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection

in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control-

ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and

interconnecting wiring associated with air bag

system electrical components.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of

the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in

the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag

system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that

may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or

it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the

instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds

for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to

the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag

Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-

function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag

Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A

single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on

again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate

the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-

tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The

diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance

free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during

the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is

first turned to the ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to

eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving.

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine

related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition

the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-

tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-

ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags

to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come

on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in

the on position, and stays on after you start the

vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an

authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-

ately.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could

be injured if the air bag system is not there to

protect you. Do not modify the components or

wiring, including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the

upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not

modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or

add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air

bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who

works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag

system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may

not function properly if modifications are made.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any

air bag system service. If your seat, including your

trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any

way (including removal or loosening/tightening of

seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your

authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved

seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to

modify the air bag system for persons with dis-

abilities, contact your authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle

is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts

were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of

the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-

sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-

forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a

crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is

required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have access to the

vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all

times, including babies and children.

Every state in the United States, and every Canadian

province, requires that small children ride in proper

restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-

ecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly

buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash

statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a

projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to

hold even an infant on your lap could become so

great that you could not hold the child, no matter

how strong you are. The child and others could be

badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle

should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child

seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct

seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the

instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s

Manual and on all the labels attached to the child

restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has

a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. You should also make sure that you can install

it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to

www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.

• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana-

da’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/

eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-

index-53.htm

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Recommended Type Of Child

Restraint

Infants and Tod-

dlers

Children who are two years old or younger

and who have not reached the height or

weight limits of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-

ible Child Restraint, facing rearward in

the rear seat of the vehicle

Small Children Children who are at least two years old or

who have out-grown the height or weight limit

of their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a

five-point Harness, facing forward in

the rear seat of the vehicle

Larger Children Children who have out-grown their forward-

facing child restraint, but are too small to

properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the

vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat

of the vehicle

Children Too Large

for Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who have

out-grown the height or weight limit of their

booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat

of the vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

Infants And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing

in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they

reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing

child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used

rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.

It is recommended for children from birth until they

reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.

Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or

forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats

often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing

direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used

rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant

carrier but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the

highest weight or height allowed by their convertible

child seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown

their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-

facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and

convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-

tion are for children who are over two years old or who

have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of

their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for

as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height

allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the

forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a

belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts

fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over

the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against

the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster

seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held

in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a

collision. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

directions exactly when installing an infant or

child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do

not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward

because it can loosen the child restraint attach-

ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting

the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has

been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in

the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-

ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it

loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it

could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause

serious personal injury.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend

over the front of the seat when their back is against the

seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this

simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the

vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of

the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front

of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the

way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder

between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching

the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the

child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the

child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit

periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.

A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of

position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,

move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use

a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child

correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an

arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt

will not protect a child properly, which may result in

serious injury or death. A child must always wear

both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt

correctly.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined

Weight of the

Child + Child

Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

LATCH –

Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH –

Lower Anchors

+ Top Tether

Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system

has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-

equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages

located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the

seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the

seating position. These anchorages are used to install

LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s

seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether

anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating

positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether

anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the

following table for more information.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In

This Vehicle

•

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

seating position

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Seats With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s

weight + weight of the child

restraint) for using the LATCH

anchorage system to attach the

child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the

seat belt and tether anchor instead of the

LATCH system once the combined weight

is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages

and the seat belt be used to-

gether to attach a rear-facing or

forward-facing child restraint?

No Do not use the seat belt when you use the

LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-

facing or forward-facing child restraint.

Can a child seat be installed in

the center position using the

inner LATCH lower anchor-

ages?

Yes You can install child restraints with flex-

ible lower anchors in the center position.

The inner anchorages are 15.5 inches (390

mm) apart. Do not install child restraints

with rigid lower anchors in the center po-

sition.

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Seats With LATCH

Can two child restraints be at-

tached using a common lower

LATCH anchorage?

No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with

two or more child restraints. If the center

position does not have dedicated LATCH

lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-

stall a child seat in the center position

next to a child seat using the LATCH an-

chorages in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child re-

straint touch the back of the

front passenger seat?

Yes The child seat may touch the back of the

front passenger seat if the child restraint

manufacturer also allows contact. See

your child restraint owner’s manual for

more information.

Can the head restraints be re-

moved?

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

Locating LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it

meets the seatback. They are just visible when

you lean into the rear seat to install the child

restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger

along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located on the back of the

seat.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.

Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower

anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the

anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some

rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end

to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten

the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach-

ments in the center seating position. Only install this type

of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child

restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach-

ments can be installed in any rear seating position.

Rear Seat Tether Anchors

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more

than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-

compatible child restraints next to each other, you

must use the seat belt for the center position. You can

then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s

seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard

positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-

Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical in-

stallation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint

manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not

all child restraint systems will be installed as described

here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat

belt, following the instructions below. See the section

“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”

to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the

tether strap of the child seat so that you can more

easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle

anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for

that seating position. For some second row seats, you

may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head

restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved

forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to

move it to its rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front seat forward

to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child

restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-

ing position.

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the

top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-

tions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint

rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack

in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a

child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being

used by other occupants or being used to secure child

restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play

with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before

installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,

buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of

the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with

the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the

child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock

the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the

seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with

them.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-

straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions

exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-

stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted

child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to

be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for

attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat

belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not

necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be

“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the

webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing

retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will

make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back

into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking

Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-

ditional information on ALR.

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s

weight + weight of the child re-

straint) for using the Tether Anchor

with the seat belt to attach a for-

ward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the

Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat

belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to

the recommended weight limit of the child re-

straint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint

touch the back of the front passen-

ger seat?

Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the

child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint

manufacturer also allows contact.

Can the head restraints be re-

moved?

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to

tighten the seat belt against the belt

path of the child restraint?

No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position

with an ALR retractor.

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating

position. For some second row seats, you may need to

recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a

better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and

rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

rear-most position to make room for the child seat.

You may also move the front seat forward to allow

more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor

to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.

Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight

against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of

the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing

out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract

back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you

will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is

now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is

locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-

bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the

lap portion around the child restraint while you push

the child restraint rearward and downward into the

vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the

seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect

the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints

Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to

attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the

belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage:

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat

to any location in front of the car seat, including the

seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether

anchorage that is approved for that seating position,

located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the

section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-

proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to

install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.

You may need to move the seat forward to provide

better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top

tether anchorage for that seating position, move the

child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one

is available.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,

routing it over the center of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Tether Anchorage Locations

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchorage position directly

behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top

tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,

make sure the tether strap does not slip into the

opening between the seatbacks as you remove

slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly

injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and

drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the

limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-

mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil

changes should be consistent with anticipated climate

conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For

the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to

“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-

hicle.”

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil

in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its

first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This

should be considered a normal part of the break-in and

not interpreted as a problem.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),

follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to move

your vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/

rear doors open, make sure that all windows are

closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is

set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation

mode.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running, adjust your heating or cooling

controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the

blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,

damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open

seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes

to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for

cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be

replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the

system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,

torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat

belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light

will turn on for four to

eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch

is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on

during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,

have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as

soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a

single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning

Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault

is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer

service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant

Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place

the blower control on high speed. You should be able to

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your

authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-

able.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your

vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area

unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they

cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals

or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of

vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-

sonal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

•

Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-

ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to

prevent them from moving and interfering with the

pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top

of already installed floor mats. Additional floor

mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the

pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always

properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have

been removed for cleaning.

•

Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the

driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects

can become trapped under the brake pedal and

accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.

• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-

stalled, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or

mounting can cause interference with the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of

control of the vehicle.

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear

patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts

and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.

Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires

(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and

exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn

signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument

panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline

fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if

equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause

should be located and corrected immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 MIRRORS ............................108

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................108

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .108

▫ Outside Mirror — Driver Side ............109

▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger Side ..........109

▫ Folding Outside Mirrors ................110

▫ Power Mirrors .......................110

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............111

▫ Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ............111

▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —

If Equipped .........................111

䡵 Uconnect PHONE — IF EQUIPPED .........112

▫ Operation ..........................114

▫ Phone Call Features ...................121

▫ Uconnect Phone Features ................124

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............129

▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect

Phone .............................131

▫ General Information ...................142

䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED ........142

▫ Voice Command System Operation .........142

▫ Commands .........................144

▫ Voice Training .......................148

䡵 SEATS ..............................148

▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ..............149

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............150

▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustment ............151

▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment —

If Equipped .........................153

▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped ...........153

▫ Driver’s Seatback Recline ................154

▫ Head Restraints ......................154

▫ Folding Rear Seat .....................158

▫ Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped .........159

䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........160

䡵 LIGHTS .............................162

▫ Multifunction Lever ...................162

▫ Headlights And Parking Lights ...........163

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......163

▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....164

▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................164

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............164

▫ Turn Signals .........................165

▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................166

▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................166

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only) .............166

▫ Instrument Panel Dimming...............166

▫ Map/Reading Lights ...................168

䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......169

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............170

▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............171

▫ Windshield Washers ...................171

▫ Headlights On With Wipers

(Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . .172

▫ Mist Feature .........................172

䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN ...............173

䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —

IF EQUIPPED .........................174

▫ To Activate ..........................175

▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................175

▫ To Deactivate ........................176

▫ To Resume Speed .....................176

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............176

▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............177

䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................178

䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .180

▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .182

▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............182

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........184

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......186

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

▫ Using HomeLink .....................187

▫ Security ............................187

▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................188

▫ General Information....................189

䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........189

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............190

▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........190

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............190

▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........191

▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................191

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............191

▫ Sunshade Operation....................191

▫ Wind Buffeting .......................191

▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................192

▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................192

䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........192

䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED.........195

䡵 CUPHOLDERS.........................197

䡵 STORAGE ............................198

▫ Glove Compartment And Storage Bin .......198

▫ Door Storage.........................199

䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES ...................200

䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................201

▫ Cargo Light .........................201

▫ Cargo Cover ........................201

▫ Removable Load Floor .................203

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Cargo Tie-Down Loops .................204

▫ Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped ........205

䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............206

▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............206

▫ Rear Window Defroster .................207

䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .208

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and

vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on

the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small

control under the mirror to the night position (toward the

rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set

in the day position (toward the windshield).

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare

from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or

off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. The

On/Off symbol on the button will illuminate when the

auto-dimming feature is enabled.

Inside Day/Night Mirror

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is

moving in reverse.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never

spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

Outside Mirror — Driver Side

Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side

of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the

vehicle with your head close to the door glass.

Outside Mirror — Passenger Side

Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the

side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the

vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away

than they really are. Relying too much on your

passenger side convex mirror could cause you to

collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your

inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a

vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side

mirror.

Folding Outside Mirrors

The outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved,

manually, either forward or rearward to resist damage.

The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full

rearward and normal.

Power Mirrors

The power mirror control is located on the driver’s door

trim panel.

To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left

or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand

in the direction you want the mirror to move.

Power Mirror Control

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the

control to the center position to prevent accidentally

moving a mirror.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear

window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-

ther information.

Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

To use the vanity mirror, rotate the sun visor down and

swing the mirror cover upward.

Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped

The sun visors may be extended out to provide more

coverage of the side glass.

Vanity Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

Uconnect PHONE — IF EQUIPPED

Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-

vehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows

you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone

using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ

“Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s

audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio sys-

tem; the system will automatically mute your radio when

using the Uconnect Phone.

NOTE: The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone

equipped with the Bluetooth “Hands-Free Profile,” Ver-

sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect website for sup-

ported phones.

For Uconnect customer support:

• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-

855-8400.

• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call,

1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).

Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the

system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your

vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone

for private conversation.

The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth

“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features

Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables

different electronic devices to connect to each other

without wires or a docking station. Uconnect Phone

operates no matter where you stow your mobile phone

(be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your

phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s

Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven

mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one

linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the

system at a time. The system is available in English,

Spanish, or French languages.

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Any voice commanded system should be used only

in safe driving conditions following all applicable

laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-

tention should be focused on safely operating the

vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision

causing serious injury or death.

Uconnect Phone Button

The radio or steering wheel controls (if

equipped) will contain the two control buttons

(Uconnect Phone

button and Voice Com-

mand button) that will enable you to

access the system. When you push the button you will

hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP. The beep

is your signal to give a command.

Voice Command Button

Actual button location may vary with the ra-

dio. The individual buttons are described in the

“Operation” section.

The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands-Free

Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone. See the

Uconnect website for supported phones. Refer to your

mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for

details.

The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s

audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be

adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or

from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if

equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from

the Uconnect Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on

certain radios.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

Operation

Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect

Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone

menu structure. Voice commands are required after most

Uconnect Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a

specific command and then guided through the available

options.

• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the

beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another

prompt.

• For certain operations, compound commands can be

used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then

“Pair a Device,” the following compound command

can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth Device.”

• For each feature explanation in this section, only the

compound form of the voice command is given. You

can also break the commands into parts and say each

part of the command when you are asked for it. For

example, you can use the compound form voice com-

mand “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the

compound form command into two voice commands:

“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the

Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal

conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a

few feet/meters away from you.

Voice Command Tree

Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.

Help Command

If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to

know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following

the beep. The Uconnect Phone will play some of the

options at any prompt if you ask for help.

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To activate the Uconnect Phone, simply push the Phone

button and follow the audible prompts for direc-

tions. Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of

the Phone

button on the radio control head.

Cancel Command

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and

you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a

few instances the system will take you back to the

previous menu.

Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone

To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your

compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-

ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect

website may also provide detailed instructions for pair-

ing.

The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone

pairing instructions:

1. Activate the Bluetooth on your mobile phone.

2. Push the Phone

button to begin.

3. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Device Pairing.”

4. When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”

and follow the audible prompts.

You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifica-

tion Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter

into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit

PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the

initial pairing process.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give

the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone. Each

mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique

phone name.

You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a

priority level between one and seven, with one being the

highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones

to your Uconnect Phone. However, at any given time,

only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your

Uconnect System. The priority allows the Uconnect

Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple

mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For

example, if priority three and priority five phones are

present in the vehicle, the Uconnect Phone will use the

priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You

can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any

time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this

section).

Dial By Saying A Number

• Push the Phone

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Dial.”

• The system will prompt you to say the number you

want to call.

• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”

• The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number

and then dial. The number will appear in the display

of certain radios.

Call By Saying A Name

• Push the Phone

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Call.”

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The system will prompt you to say the name of the

person you want to call.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

the name of the person you want to call. For example,

you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previ-

ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or

downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name

in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your

Uconnect Phonebook.”

• The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then

dial the corresponding phone number, which may

appear in the display of certain radios.

Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is

recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

To add names to the Uconnect phonebook using Voice

Commands:

1. Push the Phone

button to begin.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Phonebook New Entry.”

3. When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use

of long names helps the Voice Command and it is

recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or

“Robert” instead of “Bob.”

4. When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,

“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will

allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-

book entry, if desired.

5. When prompted, recite the phone number for the

phonebook entry that you are adding.

After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-

book, you will be given the opportunity to add more

phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the

main menu.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32

names in the phonebook with each name having up to

four associated phone numbers and designations. Each

language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible

only in that language. In addition, if equipped and

supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically

downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.

Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook

Transfer From Mobile Phone

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,

Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text

names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s

phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book

Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect

website for supported phones.

• To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or

downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call

by Saying a Name” section.

• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins

as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is

made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you

start the vehicle.

• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-

loaded and updated every time a phone is connected

to the Uconnect Phone.

• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-

loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest

downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-

able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-

able for use.

• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile

phone is accessible.

• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile

phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or

deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be

edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-

ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next

phone connection.

Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries

NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended

when the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic down-

loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.

• Push the Phone

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Phonebook Edit.”

• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook

entry that you wish to edit.

• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,

mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.

• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the

phonebook entry that you are editing.

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,

you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in

the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return

to the main menu.

“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone

number to a name entry that already exists in the

phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a

mobile and a home number, but you can add “John

Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”

feature.

Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry

NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended

when the vehicle is not in motion.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

To delete a Uconnect phonebook entry using Voice Com-

mands:

1. Push the Phone

button to begin.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Phonebook Delete.”

3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will

then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish

to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook

entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List

Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook

from which you choose. To select one of the entries

from the list, push the Voice Command

button

while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired

entry and say “Delete.”

4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect Phone will ask

you which designation you wish to delete: home,

work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you

wish to delete.

• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current

language is deleted.

NOTE: Automatic downloaded phonebook entries can-

not be deleted or edited.

Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect Phonebook Entries

To delete, or erase ALL Uconnect phonebook entries

using Voice Command:

1. Push the Phone

button to begin.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Phonebook Erase All.”

• The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you

wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.

3. After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be

deleted.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• Only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.

• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be

deleted or edited.

List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook

To hear a list of ALL names in the Uconnect phonebook

using Voice Commands:

1. Push the Phone

button to begin.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Phonebook List Names.”

• The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the

phonebook entries, including the downloaded

phonebook entries, if available.

3. To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice

Command

button during the playing of the

desired name, and say “Call.”

NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”

operations at this point.

4. The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the

number designation you wish to call.

• The selected number will be dialed.

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the

Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your

mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service

plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be

accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your

mobile service provider for the features that you have.

Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call

Currently In Progress

When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the

Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,

if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

• Push the Phone

button to accept the call.

• To reject the call, push and hold the Phone

button

until you hear a single beep, indicating that the

incoming call was rejected.

Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call

Currently In Progress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another

incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for

call waiting that you normally hear when using your

mobile phone.

• Push the Phone

button to place the current call on

hold and answer the incoming call.

NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the

market today do not support rejecting an incoming call

when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can

only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In

Progress

To make a second call while you are currently on a call,

push the Voice Command

button and say “Dial” or

“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook

entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold

while the second call is in progress. To go back to the

first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this

section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference

Call” in this section.

Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold

To put a call on hold:

1. Push the Phone

button until you hear a single

beep.

• This indicates that the call is on hold.

• To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the

Phone

button until you hear a single beep.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Toggling Between Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),

push the Phone

button until you hear a single beep,

indicating that the active and hold status of the two

calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on

hold at a time.

Conference Call

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on

hold):

1. Push and hold the Phone

button until you hear a

double beep, indicating that the two calls have been

joined into one conference call.

Three-Way Calling

To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command

button while a call is in progress, and make a

second phone call, as described under “Making a

Second Call While Current Call is in Progress.” After

the second call has established, push and hold the

Phone

button until you hear a double beep, indi-

cating that the two calls have been joined into one

conference call.

Call Termination

To end a call in progress:

1. Momentarily push the Phone

button.

• Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there

is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If

the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a

call on hold may not become active automatically.

This is cell phone-dependent.

2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the

Phone

button until you hear a single beep.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

Redial

To redial the last number called from your mobile phone

using Voice Command:

1. Push the Phone

button to begin.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Redial.”

• The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that

was dialed from your mobile phone.

NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the

Uconnect Phone.

Call Continuation

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the

Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been

switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-

able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can

continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call

ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates

cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and

transfer of the call to the mobile phone.

2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue

on the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration, after

which the call is automatically transferred from the

Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone.

3. An active call is automatically transferred to the

mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.

Uconnect Phone Features

Language Selection

To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using:

1. Push the Phone

button to begin.

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

the name of the language you wish to switch to

English, Espanol, or Francais.

3. Continue to follow the system prompts to complete

the language selection.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and

voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE: After every Uconnect Phone language change

operation, only the language-specific 32 name phone-

book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-

specific and is usable across all languages.

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is

reachable:

• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency

number for your area.

If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is

operational, you may reach the emergency number as

follows:

• Push the Phone

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the

paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.

This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and

Mexico.

NOTE:

• The emergency number dialed is based on the country

where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and

Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may

not be applicable with the available mobile service and

area.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

• If supported, this number may be programmable on

some systems. To do this, push the Phone

button

and say “Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”

• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances

of successfully making a phone call as to that for the

mobile phone directly.

WARNING!

To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency,

your mobile phone must be:

• Turned on.

• Paired to the Uconnect System.

• Have network coverage.

Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance

If you need roadside assistance:

• Push the Phone

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Towing Assistance.”

NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assis-

tance phone number using the Voice Command system.

To do this, push the Phone

button and say “Setup,”

followed by “Towing Assistance.” When prompted

say 1-800-521-2779 for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454

for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico

City in Mexico.

Paging

To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated

Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of

certain companies, which time out a little too soon to

work properly with the Uconnect Phone.

Voice Mail Calling

To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working

with Automated Systems.”

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Working With Automated Systems

This method is used in instances where one generally has

to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while

navigating through an automated telephone system.

You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail

system or an automated service, such as a paging service

or automated customer service line. Some services re-

quire immediate response selection. In some instances,

that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.

When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that

normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence

on your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice

Command

button and say the sequence you wish to

enter, followed by the word “Send.” For example, if

required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3

7 4 6 #), you can push the Voice Command

button

andsay,“3746#Send.” Saying a number, or

sequence of numbers, followed by “Send,” is also to be

used for navigating through an automated customer

service center menu structure, and to leave a number

on a pager.

You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as

tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager

entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to

call and then push the Voice Command

button and

say “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the

name or number and say the name of the phonebook

entry you wish to send. The Uconnect Phone will then

send the corresponding phone number associated

with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.

NOTE:

• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone

network configurations. This is normal.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time

out settings that are too short and may not allow the

use of this feature.

Barge In — Overriding Prompts

The “Voice Command” button can be used when you

wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice

command immediately. For example, if a prompt is

asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you

could push the Voice Command

button and say,

“Pair a Phone” to select that option without having to

listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF

Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system

from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect Phone

will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

1. Push the Phone

button to begin.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

one of the following:

• “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”

• “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”

Phone And Network Status Indicators

If available on the radio and/or on a premium display

such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by

your mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will provide

notification to inform you of your phone and network

status when you are attempting to make a phone call

using Uconnect Phone. The status is given for network

signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad

You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone

keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing

via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise

caution and take precautionary safety measures). By

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile

phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s

audio system. The Uconnect Phone will work the same as

if you dial the number using Voice Command.

NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the

dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle

audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-

tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel

that the call did not go through even though the call is in

progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the

audio.

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)

When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be

able to hear the conversation coming from the other

party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To

mute the Uconnect Phone:

• Push the Voice Command

button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute.”

To un-mute the Uconnect Phone:

• Push the Voice Command

button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”

Advanced Phone Connectivity

Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone

The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-

ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone

without terminating the call.

To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone

paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa

using Voice Command:

1. Push the Voice Command

button and say “Trans-

fer Call.”

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The

Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone

Your mobile phone can be paired with many different

electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”

with one electronic device at a time.

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth

connection between your mobile phone and the

Uconnect Phone System, follow the instructions de-

scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.

List Paired Mobile Phone Names

• Push the Phone

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Setup Phone Pairing.”

• When prompted, say “List Phones.”

• The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all

paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the

lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone

being announced, push the Voice Command

but-

ton and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next

two sections for an alternate way to “Select” or

“Delete” a paired phone.

Select Another Mobile Phone

This feature allows you to select and start using another

phone paired with the Uconnect Phone.

• Push the Phone

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.

• You can also push the Phone

button at any time

while the list is being played, and then choose the

phone that you wish to select.

• The selected phone will be used for the next phone

call. If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Phone will return to using the highest priority phone

present in or near (approximately within 30 ft. [9 m])

the vehicle.

Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones

To delete mobile phones paired with the Uconnect phone

using Voice Commands:

1. Push the Phone

button to begin.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Setup Phone Pairing.”

3. At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the

prompts.

• You can also push the Phone

button at any time

while the list is being played, and choose the

phone you wish to delete.

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect

Phone

Uconnect Phone Tutorial

To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the

Phone

button and say “Uconnect Tutorial.”

Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-

nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect

Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this

training mode, follow one of the two following proce-

dures:

• From outside the Uconnect Phone mode (e.g., from

radio mode), push and hold the Voice Command

button for five seconds until the session begins,

or,

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

• Push the Voice Command

button and say the

“Voice Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice

Training” command.

You can either push the Uconnect Phone button to restore

the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when

prompted by the Uconnect Phone. For best results, the

Voice Training session should be completed when the

vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows

closed, and the blower fan switched off.

This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The

system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

Reset

To Reset all settings using Voice Command:

1. Push the Phone

button.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Setup,” then “Reset.”

• This will delete all phone pairing, phone book en-

tries, and other settings in all language modes. The

System will prompt you before resetting to factory

settings.

Voice Command

For best performance:

• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch

(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)

and the mirror.

• Always wait for the beep before speaking.

• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would

speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from

you.

• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking

during a Voice Command period.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Performance is maximized under:

• Low-to-medium blower setting

• Low-to-medium vehicle speed

• Low road noise

• Smooth road surface

• Fully closed windows

• Dry weather condition

NOTE:

• Even though the system is designed for users speaking

in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-

cents, the system may not always work for some.

• When navigating through an automated system such

as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of

speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”

• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is

not in motion is recommended.

• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names

in the Uconnect Phonebook.

• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local)

name recognition rate is optimized when the entries

are not similar.

• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must

be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”

• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).

• Even though international dialing for most number

combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing

number combinations may not be supported.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Far End Audio Performance

Audio quality is maximized under:

• Low-to-medium blower setting

• Low-to-medium vehicle speed

• Low road noise

• Smooth road surface

• Fully closed windows

• Dry weather conditions

• Operation from the driver’s seat

• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness

to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and

not the Uconnect Phone

• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced

by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume

Recent Calls

If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-

load,” Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming

and Missed Calls.

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your

phone.

Read Messages:

If you receive a new text message while your phone is

connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be

made to notify you that you have a new text message. If

you wish to hear the new message:

1. Push the Phone

button.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for

you.

After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”

the message using Uconnect Phone.

Send Messages:

You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a

new message:

1. Push the Phone

button.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”

3. You can either say the message you wish to send or

say “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.

To send a message, push the Voice Command

button

while the system is listing the message and say

“Send.” Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the

name or number of the person you wish to send the

message to.

List of Preset Messages:

1. Yes.

2. No.

3. Where are you?

4. I need more direction.

5. L O L.

6. Why?

7. I love you.

8. Call me.

9. Call me later.

10. Thanks.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

11. See you in 15 minutes.

12. I am on my way.

13. I’ll be late.

14. Are you there yet?

15. Where are we meeting?

16. Can this wait?

17. Bye for now.

18. When can we meet?

19. Send number to call.

20. Start without me.

Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement ON/OFF

Turning the Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement

OFF will stop the system from announcing the new

incoming messages.

To turn Voice Text Reply incoming announcement on or

off using Voice Command:

1. Push the Phone

button.

2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Setup Incoming Message Announcement,” you will

then be given a choice to change it.

Bluetooth Communication Link

Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the

Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can

generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/

on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in

Bluetooth ON mode.

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the

ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you

must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

Voice Commands

Primary Alternate (s)

zero

one

two

three

four

five

six

seven

eight

nine

star (*)

plus (+)

pound (#)

add location

Primary Alternate (s)

all

call

cancel

confirmation prompts

continue

delete

dial

download

edit

emergency

English

erase all

Espanol

Francais

help

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Primary Alternate (s)

home

language

list names

list phones

mobile

mute

mute off

new entry

other

pair a phone

phone pairing pairing

phonebook phone book

record again

Primary Alternate (s)

redial

return to main menu return or main menu

select phone select

send

set up phone settings or phone

set up

towing assistance

transfer call

Uconnect Tutorial

voice training

work

yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

Voice Command System Operation

The Uconnect Voice Command system allows

you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,

USB mass storage class device, iPod family of

devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device,

satellite radio, and a memo recorder.

NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System

as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the

Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands

may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised

voice level.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Any voice commanded system should be used only

in safe driving conditions following all applicable

laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-

tention should be focused on safely operating the

vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision

causing serious injury or death.

When you push the Voice Command

button, you will

hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a com-

mand.

NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few

seconds, the system will present you with a list of

options.

If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists

options, push the Voice Command

button, listen for

the beep, and say your command.

Pushing the Voice Command

button while the sys-

tem is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system

will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or

change commands. This will become helpful once you

start to learn the options.

NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”

“Help” or “Main Menu.”

These commands are universal and can be used from any

menu. All other commands can be used depending upon

the active application.

When using this system, you should speak clearly and at

a normal speaking volume.

The system will best recognize your speech if the win-

dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning blower

is set to low.

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your

commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Com-

mand

button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”

Commands

The Voice Command system understands two types of

commands, Universal commands and Local commands.

Universal commands are available at all times. Local

commands are available if the supported radio mode is

active.

Changing The Volume

1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command

button.

2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the

volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-

mand system is speaking. Please note the volume

setting for Voice Command is different than the audio

system.

Main Menu

Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command

but-

ton. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main

menu.

In this mode, you can say the following commands:

• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)

• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)

• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)

• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)

• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth Stream-

ing mode)

• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)

• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)

Radio AM

To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In

this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)

• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)

• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Radio FM

To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In

this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)

• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)

• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Satellite Radio

To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite

Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com-

mands:

• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its

spoken number)

• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)

• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)

• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)

• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Disc Mode

To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you

may say the following commands:

• “Track” (#) (to change the track)

• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)

• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

USB Mode

To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you

may say the following commands:

• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)

• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album

Name, Track Name, etc.)

Bluetooth Streaming (BT) Mode

To switch to Bluetooth Streaming (BT) mode, say

“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the

following commands:

• “Play” (to play the current track)

• “Pause” (to pause the current track)

• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Memo Mode

To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In

this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the

recording, you may push the Voice Command

but-

ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of

the following commands:

– “Save” (to save the memo)

– “Continue” (to continue recording)

– “Delete” (to delete the recording)

• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —

During the playback you may push the Voice Com-

mand

button to stop playing memos. You pro-

ceed by saying one of the following commands:

– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)

– “Next” (to play the next memo)

– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)

– “Delete” (to delete a memo)

– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)

Setup

To switch to system setup, you may say one of the following:

• “Change to setup”

• “Switch to system setup”

• “Main menu setup”

• “Switch to setup”

In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “Language English”

• “Language French”

• “Language Spanish”

• “Tutorial”

• “Voice Training”

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice

Command

button first and wait for the beep before

speaking the “Barge In” commands.

Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-

nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect

Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.

1. Push the Voice Command

button, say “System

Setup” and once you are in that menu then say

“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to

the system and will improve recognition.

2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by

Uconnect Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”

session should be completed when the vehicle is

parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the

blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re-

peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the

last trained voice only.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the

vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Seats — If Equipped

Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s

seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard

side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the

seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious

injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat

belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted

seat belt.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or

impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to

the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if

movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s

path.

Power Seat Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch

when the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull

upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat

will move in the direction of the switch. Release the

switch when the desired position is reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four

directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front

or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat

cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release

the switch when the desired position is reached.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front driver and passenger seats

may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions

and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are

located on the center instrument panel area.

You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber

indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in

use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for

LO and none for OFF.

Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.

Push the switch a second time to select LO-

level heating. Push the switch a third time to

shut the heating elements OFF.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will

provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of

operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal

HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will

automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 30

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the dis-

play will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.

When the LO-level heating is selected, the system auto-

matically turns the heater and the indicator light OFF

after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt

within two to five minutes.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion or other physical condition must exercise care

when using the seat heater. It may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if used for

long periods of time.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.

This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting

in a seat that has been overheated could cause

serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-

ture of the seat.

Manual Front Seat Adjustment

On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting

bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the

seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have

reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,

move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that

the seat adjusters have latched.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious

injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat

belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted

seat belt.

Manual Seat Adjusting Bar

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped

The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using

a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull

upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push

downward on the lever to lower the seat height.

Manual Lumbar — If Equipped

The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the inboard

or outboard side of the seatback. Rotate the lever down-

ward to increase the lumbar support or rotate the lever

upward to decrease the lumbar support.

Seat Height Adjustment Lever Outboard Lumbar Adjustment Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Driver’s Seatback Recline

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the

outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired angle

and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever,

lean forward and release the lever.

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,

which could result in serious injury or death.

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury

by restricting head movement in the event of a rear

impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top

of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

Recline Lever

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-

erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the

vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should

never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.

Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly

adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or

death in the event of a collision.

Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front

Seats

Active Head Restraints (AHRs) are passive, deployable

components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be

readily identified by any markings, only through visual

inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be

split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam

and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half

of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap

between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.

This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the

extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in

certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-

straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-

hicle” for further information.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-

ment button located at the base of the head restraint and

push downward on the head restraint.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted

forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to

the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the

head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head

restraint to move the head restraint away from your

head.

Adjustment Button Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• The head restraints should only be removed by quali-

fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of

the head restraints require removal, see your autho-

rized dealer.

• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-

straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active

Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver, should not

operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their proper positions

in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a collision.

• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head

Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable

DVD players. These items may interfere with the

operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event

of a collision and could result in serious injury or

death.

(Continued)

Active Head Restraint (Tilted Position)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

WARNING! (Continued)

• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are

struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose

cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-

tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,

as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-

straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this

warning could cause personal injury if the Active

Head Restraint is deployed.

Rear Head Restraints

The head restraints in the rear are non adjustable. Refer to

“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-

ing Your Vehicle” for information on Tether routing.

Folding Rear Seat

To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can

be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to fold the rear

seatback flat.

Rear Seat Release Straps

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To raise the seatback, pull the strap forward and lift the

seatback into its upright position.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback is not securely locked into

position the seat will not provide the proper stability

for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly

latched seat could cause serious injury.

Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped

For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just

enough to release the seatback latch. Then push the

seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees

maximum, and release the strap.

Folded Rear Seat

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and

be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner

only when the vehicle is parked.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick

panel.

2. Move the safety latch, located outside the vehicle

under the front edge of the hood, toward the center

and raise the hood.

Hood Release Lever

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side

facing hood) of the engine compartment to secure the

hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the

location stamped into the inner hood surface.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage:

• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod

is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.

(Continued)

Hood Safety Latch Location Prop Rod Location

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm

downward push at the center front edge of the

hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never

drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,

with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your

vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open

when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

LIGHTS

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the

headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam

selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights,

the passing lights, and the fog lights. The multifunction

lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

Multifunction Lever

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Headlights And Parking Lights

Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent

to turn on the parking lights. Turn the end of the lever to

the second detent to turn on the headlights.

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third

detent (AUTO), will activate the automatic headlight

system.

Headlight Control Headlight Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

With the engine running and the multifunction lever in

the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and turn

off based on the surrounding light levels.

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running

Lights (lower intensity), whenever the ignition is ON, the

engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking

brake is off, the turn signal is off, and the gear selector is

in any position except PARK.

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the

ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the

driver when the driver’s door is opened.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The front fog light switch is on the multifunc-

tion lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn

on the parking lights or the low beam head-

lights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever.

Front Fog Light Operation

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-

lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will

turn off the fog lights.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows

on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show

proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or

there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside

light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is

moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is

defective.

Turn Signal Operation

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond

the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash

three times then automatically turn off.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch

the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever

toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This

will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is

released.

NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-

pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams

will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next

flash-to-pass operation.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on

approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on

if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In

addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are

turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be

turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Instrument Panel Dimming

Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme

bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights

and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a

door is opened.

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the

brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-

ing lights or headlights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next

detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when

the parking lights or headlights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last

detent to turn on the interior lighting.

Dimmer Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted between the sun visors above

the rear view mirror. Each light is turned on by pushing

the button. Push the button a second time to turn the

light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened

or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the

second detent.

NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is

pushed a second time, so be sure they have been turned

off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off

automatically.

Map/Reading Lights

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer control lever is

located on the right side of the steering column.

The front wipers are operated by rotating a

switch, located on the end of the lever. For information

on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Fea-

tures” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

CAUTION!

• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving

through an automatic car wash. Damage to the

windshield wipers may result if the wiper control

is left in any position other than off.

• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch

and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-

tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper

switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the

windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur

when the vehicle is restarted.

• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents

the windshield wiper blades from returning to the

off position. If the windshield wiper control is

turned off and the blades cannot return to the off

position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent

past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper opera-

tion. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third

detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper

operation.

Windshield Wiper Operation

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions

make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-

tween cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by

turning the end of the lever. Rotate the end of the lever

upward (clockwise) to decrease the delay time and

downward (counterclockwise) to increase the delay time.

The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approxi-

mately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every

second.

NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.

If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),

delay times will be doubled.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and

hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in

the delay range, the wiper will operate in low-speed

while the lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after the

lever is released, and then resume the intermittent inter-

val previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers

will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

could lead to a collision. You might not see other

vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of

the windshield during freezing weather, warm the

windshield with the defroster before and during

windshield washer use.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on

approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on

if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In

addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are

turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be

turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Mist Feature

Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe

to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a

passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the

wipers will continue to operate.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer

pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the

windshield. The wash function must be used in order to

spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Mist Operation

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TILT STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column

upward or downward. The tilt steering column lever is

located on the left side of the steering column, below the

turn signal lever.

Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.

With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the

steering column up or down, as desired. Push the lever

up to lock the steering column firmly in place.

Tilt Steering Column Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-

ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause

the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to

follow this warning may result in serious injury or

death.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over

accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the

right side of the steering wheel.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -

2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-

tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut

down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at

the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic

Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired

vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in

the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system

off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise

Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be

turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally

set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle

has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button

and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will

operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed

and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL

button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the

vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-

out erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition

switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)

button and release. Resume can be used at any speed

above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-

crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the

instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a

1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of

the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-

crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the

instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the

vehicle set speed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains

speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so

it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed

Control.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the

system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-

hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you

could lose control and have an accident. Do not use

Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads

that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear

Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen

image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever

the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be

displayed on the touchscreen along with a caution note to

“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.

After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView

camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear

license plate.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear

camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen

appears again.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay

feature and it is turned On, the rear camera image will be

displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex-

ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into

⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF

position.

Static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle.

The static grid lines will show separate zones that will

help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of

the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate

distances for each zone:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)

Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always

check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-

structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are

responsible for the safety of your surroundings and

must continue to pay attention while backing up.

Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be

used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is

unable to view every obstacle or object in your

drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be

driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to

stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-

mended that the driver look frequently over his/her

shoulder when using ParkView.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance

builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with

water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-

held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage

door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security

systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s

battery.

The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead

console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-

ent HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is

located above the center button.

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security

Alarm is active.

HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage

before you begin programming.

For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-

sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that

a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of

the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink

system.

To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN

position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink

buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red

indicator flashes.

NOTE:

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when

programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not

erase channels when programming additional buttons.

• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manu-

factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be

identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located

where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door

opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to

open and close the door. The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to

8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to

program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light

in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to

program while you push and hold the hand-held

transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-

cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly

and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the

frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-

lease both buttons after the indicator light changes

from slow to rapid.

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),

locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can

usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the garage door opener/device motor.

Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-

ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices

there may be a light that blinks when the garage door

opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next

step after the LEARN button has been pushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed

HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two

seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device

activates, programming is complete.

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-

vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to

complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat

each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the

channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-

ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining

steps.

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured

before 1995.

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to

8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to

program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light

in view.

3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to

program while you push and hold the hand-held

transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-

cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly

and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the

frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-

lease both buttons after the indicator light changes

from slow to rapid.

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button

and observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-

ming is complete and the garage door/device should

activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,

repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Non-Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-

ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all

remaining steps.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States

that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after

several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-

nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-

mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink

to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to

time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling

process to prevent possible overheating of the garage

door or gate motor.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to

8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to

program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light

in view.

3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,

while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held

transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has

successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-

cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when

fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash

rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take

up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage

door may open and close while you are programming.

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button

and observe the indicator light.

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-

ming is complete and the garage door/device should

activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,

repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for

programming, plug it back in at this time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Canadian/Gate Operator)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with

“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and

follow all remaining steps.

Using HomeLink

To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink

button. Activation will now occur for the programmed

device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security

system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The

hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at

any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn

in your vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20

seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all

channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be

erased.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when

the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here

are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-

held transmitter.

• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener

to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

• Did you unplug the device for programming and

remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-

gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas

can cause serious injury or death.

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are programming the universal trans-

ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,

pets or other objects are in the path of the door or

gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door

opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as

required by Federal safety standards. This includes

most garage door opener models manufactured

(Continued)

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without

these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515

or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety

information or assistance.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead

console.

Power Sunroof Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key

Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-

sible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-

tended children, can become entrapped by the

power sunroof while operating the power sunroof

switch. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown

from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could

also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten

your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-

gers are properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.

Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any

object to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

Opening Sunroof — Express

Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half

second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-

cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will

open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express

Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actua-

tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward

to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a

partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is

pushed again.

Closing Sunroof — Express

Push the switch forward and release it within one-half

second and the sunroof will close automatically from any

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-

cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express

Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will

stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the

forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially

closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of

the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-

struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the

sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-

tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and

release to Express Close.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Push and release the Vent button within one half second

and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is

called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of

sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any

other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the

sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is

open.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows

together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs

with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to

minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)

The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45

seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK

position. Opening either front door will cancel this

feature.

For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to

approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is

turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door

will cancel this feature.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located

in the Integrated Center Stack (ICS) for added conve-

nience. This power outlet can power mobile phones,

electronics and other low power devices.

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON

or ACC position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug

into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element,

do not hold the lighter in the heating position.

NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and

element must be used.

CAUTION!

• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13

Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power

rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system

will need to be replaced.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not insert any other object in the power

outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the

fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause

damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

12 Volt Power Outlet

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet

should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the

vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or

prevent the engine from starting.

(Continued)

Power Outlet Fuse Location

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-

tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-

tently and with great caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

A 115 Volt (150 Watt) AC power inverter is located on the

front of the center console for added convenience. This

outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other

low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.

Certain high-end video games consoles will exceed this

power limit, as will most power tools.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload

protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,

the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once

the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the

inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating

exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter

may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter

manually, unplug the device and plug it in again. To

avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on

electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or

prevent engine starting.

(Continued)

115 Volt Power Outlet

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-

tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-

tently and with great caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

CUPHOLDERS

Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders. There are

two illuminated cupholders located in the front.

Front Cupholders

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear

passengers.

STORAGE

Glove Compartment And Storage Bin

Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are

an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment.

Rear Cupholders

Storage Bins

1 — Upper Storage Bin

2 — Lower Glove Compartment

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To open the lower glove compartment, pull outward on

the release handle.

Door Storage

The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage

areas.

Glove Compartment

Front Door Storage

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

CONSOLE FEATURES

The floor console contains both an upper and lower

storage compartment.

To open the upper storage compartment, push inward on

the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid

open.

To open the lower storage compartment, lift upward on

the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart-

ment and lift the lid open.

Rear Door Storage

Upper Storage Compartment

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-

ment lid in the open position. Driving with the

console compartment lid open may result in injury in

a collision.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Light

The light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo

area to illuminate the cargo area.

Cargo Cover

The cargo area trim panels include two notches for

mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo-

dates the reclining rear seat.

To install the Cargo Cover, insert either end of the cover

into one of the two notches located in the rear trim

panels. With one of the cover ends installed, push inward

on the opposite end and install it into the same notch

location of the rear trim panel.

Lower Storage Compartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

Using the handle, pull the cover toward you and guide

the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides

of the rear trim panel.

Rear Trim Notches Cargo Cover Guides

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

In a collision a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could

cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and

strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo

cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-

ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken

from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.

Removable Load Floor

The cargo area load floor is removable and can be

washed with mild soap and water.

Removable Load Floor

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

Cargo Tie-Down Loops

There are four tie-downs (D-rings) installed in the cargo

area for securing cargo.

WARNING!

• Cargo tie-down loops are not safe anchors for a

child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision

a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to

come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use

only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.

• The weight and position of cargo and passengers

can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle

handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in

personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading

your vehicle:

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put

heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-

sible.

(Continued)

Cargo Area Tie-Downs

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight

over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of

the vehicle to sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of

the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-

come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or

collision.

• To help protect against personal injury, passengers

should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear

cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes

only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats

and use seat belts.

Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped

When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down

off the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and

other activities.

Fold Down Speakers

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch

located on the center portion of the control lever. The

control lever is located on the right side of the steering

column.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to

the first detent position for rear wiper operation.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control Lever

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode

only.

Rotate the center portion of the lever past the

first detent to activate the rear washer. The

washer pump and the wiper will continue to

operate as long as the switch is held (for a

maximum of 10 seconds). Upon release, the wiper will

continue to cycle two times before returning to the set

position.

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned

OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”

position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-

sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this

happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position

and will not go to “park”.

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located on

the climate controls mode control knob. Push the

button to turn on the rear window defroster and the

heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the

button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is

on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five

minutes of operation, push the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear

window defroster only when the engine is operating.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the

cargo on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load

must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly

distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized

dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built

specifically for this roof rack system.

Distribute cargo weight evenly on the luggage rack

crossbars. The luggage rack does not increase the total

load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total

load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external

rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

The crossbars must also be secured in one of the seven

detent positions marked with an arrow on the siderails to

prevent movement. To move the crossbars, loosen the

thumb screws located at the upper edge of each crossbar

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

approximately eight turns, then move the crossbar to the

desired position, keeping the crossbars perpendicular to

the luggage rack side rails. Once the crossbar is in one of

the seven detent positions, retighten the thumb screws to

lock the crossbar into position.

NOTE:

• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not

in use, place the front crossbar in the first detent from

the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the

second detent from the rear of the vehicle.

• If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed

over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may

experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For

improved satellite radio reception, place the rear cross-

bar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle

when not in use.

CAUTION!

• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO

NOT carry any loads on the luggage rack without

crossbars installed. The load should be secured and

placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the

roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,

place a blanket or some other protection between

the load and the roof surface.

• To avoid damage to the luggage rack and vehicle,

do not exceed the maximum luggage rack load

capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy

loads as evenly as possible and secure the load

appropriately.

• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such

as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large

frontal area should be secured to both the front and

rear of the vehicle.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully

when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof

rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby

truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.

This is especially true on large flat loads and may

result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied before driving your

vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the

vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-

sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack

cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........214

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................215

䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......219

▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............220

▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............229

▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............240

▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............242

▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ............242

䡵 MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED .....243

▫ Control Buttons .......................244

䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED ..................245

▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System — If

Equipped ...........................248

▫ EVIC Functions .......................249

▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio ............249

▫ Average Fuel Economy..................250

▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) ................250

▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)..............250

▫ Elapsed Time ........................251

▫ Display Units Of Measure In .............251

▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features) ...........................251

䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................256

䡵 UCONNECT 230 – AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND

6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX

JACK) ..............................258

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode.......259

▫ Operation Instructions — DISC Mode For CD And

MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD – Video .......267

▫ LIST Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA

Play ...............................272

▫ INFO Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA

Play ...............................272

▫ Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . . .274

䡵 UCONNECT 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................279

▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)

— If Equipped .......................279

▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If

Equipped ...........................279

䡵 UCONNECT 130 .......................279

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ......279

▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And

MP3 Audio Play ......................283

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............285

▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .288

䡵 UCONNECT 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . .288

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ......289

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And

MP3 Audio Play ......................295

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............297

▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play......300

▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play .....300

▫ Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . . .301

䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .305

▫ Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device .306

▫ Using This Feature.....................307

▫ Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device

Using Radio Buttons ...................307

▫ Play Mode ..........................307

▫ List Or Browse Mode ...................309

▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) .........311

䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......312

▫ Radio Operation ......................313

▫ CD Player ...........................313

䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........314

䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .314

䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................315

▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ......315

▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Equipped ...........................319

▫ Operating Tips .......................325

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet 5 — Storage Bin 9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped

2 — Demisters 6 — Glove Compartment 10 — Hazard Warning Flasher

3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Climate Controls 11 — ESC OFF Switch – If Equipped

4 — Radio 8 — Power Outlet 12 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

1. Speedometer

• The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles

per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display This

display indicates the total distance the vehicle has

been driven.

NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-

fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-

chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been

driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,

the repair technician should leave the odometer reading

the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he

cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and

a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the

mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea

for you to make a record of the odometer reading before

the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is

properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if

the odometer must be reset at zero.

2. Tachometer

• This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,

ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-

perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-

cates that the engine cooling system is operating

satisfactorily.

• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-

perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-

tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the

upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately

and call an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer

for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to

look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

4. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If

Equipped / Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Dis-

play

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If

Equipped

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features

a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

cluster. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” in this section for further information.

Message Display Area

When the appropriate conditions exist, the following

odometer messages will display:

door .............................Door Ajar

gATE ..........................Liftgate Ajar

LoW tirE ....................LowTirePressure

gASCAP ......................Fuel Cap Fault

noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault

CHAngE OIL ..............OilChange Required

LoCOOL .......................LowCoolant

NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area

located in the instrument cluster.

Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —

If Equipped” in this section for further information.

LoW tirE

When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer

display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three

cycles.

gASCAP

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display

area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the

STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the

message. If the problem continues, the message will

appear the next time the vehicle is started.

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

noFUSE

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition

Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or damaged, a

“noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display

area. Refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for

further information on fuses and fuse locations.

CHAngE OIL

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The odometer display will toggle be-

tween CHAngE and Oil for approximately 12 seconds,

after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next

scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change

indicator system is duty cycle-based, which means the

engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon

your personal driving style.

5. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank

when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position

The fuel pump symbol points

to the side of the

vehicle where the fuel door is located.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on

in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-

sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These

indications are indicative and precautionary and as such

must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative

to the information contained in the Owner Manual,

which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.

Always refer to the information in this chapter in the

event of a failure indication.

All active telltales will display first if applicable. The

system check menu may appear different based upon

equipment options and current vehicle status. Some

telltales are optional and may not appear.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

Red Telltale Indicator Lights

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight

seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a

chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-

buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will

sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for

further information.

220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Air Bag Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is

first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on

while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This

light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has

been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer

to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further infor-

mation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221

Brake Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

United States

Canada

Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-

voir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at

the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system

malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock

Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will

remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake

booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may

be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-

sary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have

a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-

proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is

detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light

inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-

tion.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security

alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

Oil Pressure Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-

hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns

on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how

much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Engine Temperature Warning Light

Red Warning

Light

What It Means

Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and

the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after

reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4

minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system

is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-

perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-

vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-

mation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225

Oil Temperature Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the

vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.

226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Charging System Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Charging System Warning Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes

on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase

engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is

experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an

authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-

gencies.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a

problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-

pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and

completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should

turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-

able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and

you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your

vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/

RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,

have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic

System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The

light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb

does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked

promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate

the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-

eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not

require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to

immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-

viced as soon as possible if this occurs.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine

control system. It also could affect fuel economy and

driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic

converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

Immediate service is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced

above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal

operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you

drive slowly or park over flammable substances such

as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result

in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or

others.

230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure

is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these

cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the

indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more

flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the

vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair

immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and

contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be

checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when using re-

placement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-

market tire sealant it is recommended that you take

your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your

sensor function checked.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch

is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC

Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been

detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-

hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h),

see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each

time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was

turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;

the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the

brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake

system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the

benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal (10.6 L), this light will turn on and a

single chime will sound.

4WD! Warning Light — If Equipped

Yellow Tell-

tale Light

What It Means

4WD! Warning Light — If Equipped

This light monitors the 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) system. The light will come on, for a bulb check,

when the ignition key is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as three

seconds.

When lit solid: There is a 4WD system fault. 4WD performance will be at a reduced level. Ser-

vice the 4WD system soon.

When blinking: The 4WD system is temporarily disabled due to overload condition.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-

gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.

Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.

238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Transmission Temperature Indicator Light

Yellow Tell-

tale Light

What It Means

Transmission Temperature Indicator Light

This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with

severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle.

Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light

turns off.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-

ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause

severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the

Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-

nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in

contact with hot engine or exhaust components and

cause a fire.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Green Tell-

tale Light

What It Means

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn

signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when

the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).

NOTE:

•

A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either

turn signal on.

•

Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241

Blue Telltale Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Blue Telltale

Light

What It Means

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control

lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to

switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high

beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.

White Telltale Indicator Lights

Cruise Control On Indicator Light

White Telltale

Light

What It Means

Cruise Control On Indicator Light

This indicator shows when the electronic speed control system is turned on.

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Hill Descent Indicator Light — If Equipped

White Tell-

tale Light

What It Means

Hill Descent Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp will

be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD

LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not

met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.

MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED

The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument

cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information

and temperature display.

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside

temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to

be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-

ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the

displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings

are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

Control Buttons

STEP Button

Push the STEP button located on the steering wheel to

scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Func-

tions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).

RESET Button

To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the

ON position, then push and hold the RESET button

located on the steering wheel.

The following displays can be reset or changed:

• Trip A

• Trip B

Trip Odometer (ODO)

This display shows the distance traveled since the last

reset. Push and release the STEP button on the instru-

ment cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.

Trip A

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last

reset.

Mini-Trip Control Buttons

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Trip B

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last

reset.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-

tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the

instrument cluster.

The EVIC consists of the following:

• System Status

• Units

• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)

• Compass Heading

• Outside Temperature Display

• Trip Computer Functions

• Uconnect Phone Displays (if equipped)

• Audio Mode Display

• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

The system allows the driver to select information by

pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering

wheel:

MENU Button

Push and release the MENU button to scroll

through the main menus (Fuel Economy, Warn-

ings, Timer, Units, System, Personal Settings)

or to exit submenus.

EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

COMPASS Button

Push and release the COMPASS button to

display one of eight compass readings and the

outside temperature or to exit sub-menus.

RIGHT Arrow Button

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button for

access to main menus, submenus, or to select a

personal setting in the setup menu.

DOWN Arrow Button

Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the submenus.

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays

the following messages:

• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime

after 1 mile (1.6 km) of distance travelled)

• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)

• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)

• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single

chime)

• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)

• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)

• Personal Settings Not Avail. — Vehicle is not in PARK

(automatic transmission), or vehicle is in motion

(manual transmission).

• Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is

open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in

motion).

• Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors

are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in

motion).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

• Gate (with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate open

and a single chime)

• Headlamps or Park Lamps On

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault

• Key In Ignition

• Low Tire

• Low Tire Pressure Display for Premium TPM System

• Service TPM System

Engine Oil Change Indicator System — If

Equipped

Oil Change Required

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message

will display in the EVIC display for approximately five

seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the

next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change

indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the

engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon

your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN

position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and

release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument

cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after

performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the

following procedure.

248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not

start the engine.

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

EVIC Functions

• Compass/Temperature/Audio

• Average Fuel Economy

• Distance To Empty (DTE)

• Units In

• Elapsed Time

• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

• Personal Settings

To Reset The Display

Pushing and holding the RIGHT

arrow button once

will clear the function currently being displayed. Reset

will only occur if a resettable function is currently

being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, push

and release the RIGHT

arrow button a second time

within three seconds of resetting the currently dis-

played function. Reset ALL will be displayed during

this three-second window.

Compass/Temperature/Audio

Push and release the COMPASS button to display one of

eight compass headings to indicate the direction the

vehicle is facing, the outside temperature, and the current

radio station.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

Refer to “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)” in this section for additional information re-

garding the compass.

Average Fuel Economy

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset

(pushing and holding the RIGHT

arrow button as

prompted in the EVIC display to reset). When the fuel

economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or

show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history infor-

mation will be erased, and the averaging will continue

from the last fuel reading before the reset.

Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with

the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is

determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous

and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel

tank level. This is not resettable.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle

loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of

the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)

estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change

to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will

continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a

significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the

⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will be dis-

played, based on the current values in the DTE calcula-

tion and the current fuel tank level.

Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in

“Starting And Operating” for system operation.

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.

Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is

in the RUN/START position.

Elapsed time is displayed as follows:

hours: minutes: seconds

Elapsed time can be reset by pushing and holding the

RIGHT

arrow button (as prompted in the EVIC

display). Upon reset, all digits will change to zeros,

and time will start again if the ignition switch is in

RUN or START.

Display Units Of Measure In

To make your selection, push and release the RIGHT

arrow button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)

This allows the driver to set and recall features when the

transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the

vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).

Push and release the MENU or DOWN

arrow button

until “Personal Settings” is displayed in the EVIC then

push and release the RIGHT

arrow button.

Use the RIGHT

arrow button to display one of the

following choices:

Language

When in this display, you may select different languages

for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.

Pushing the RIGHT

arrow button while in this

display selects English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano,

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

Francais, or NL depending on availability. As you

continue, the displayed information will be shown in

the selected language.

NOTE: Uconnect language will not change using the

EVIC. Please refer to “Uconnect Phone Features” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-

ther information.

Auto Lock Doors — If Equipped

When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when

the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Push

and hold the RIGHT

arrow button when in this

display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your

selection.

Auto Unlock On Exit

When ON is selected, all the vehicle’s doors will unlock

when the driver’s door is opened, if the vehicle is

stopped (manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped

and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL

position (automatic transmission). Push and hold the

RIGHT

arrow button when in this display until

“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.

RKE Unlock

When Driver’s Door 1st is selected, only the driver’s door

will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second

push to unlock the remaining locked doors. When Re-

mote Unlock All Doors is selected, all of the doors will

unlock at the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK

button. Push and hold the RIGHT

arrow button

when in this display until “Driver’s Door 1st” or “All

Doors” appears to make your selection.

Flash Lamps With Lock

When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will

flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the

RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

without the sound horn with lock feature selected. Push

and hold the RIGHT

arrow button when in this

display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your

selection.

Sound Horn With Lock

When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when

the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pushed. This feature

may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with

Lock feature. Push and hold the RIGHT

arrow but-

ton when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears

to make your selection.

Headlamp Off Delay

When this feature is selected the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. Push and hold the RIGHT

arrow button when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or

90 appears to make your selection.

Headlamps with Wipers (Available with Auto

Headlights Only)

When on is selected, and the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-

mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. If the

headlights were turned on by this feature, they will also

turn off when the wipers are turned off. To make your

selection, push and release the RIGHT

arrow button

until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime

causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the

brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle.”

Key Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected the power window

switches, radio, Uconnect phone, power sunroof, and

power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes

after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. Push and

hold the RIGHT

arrow button when in this display

until “OFF,” “45 sec.”, “5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears

to make your selection.

Illuminated Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate

and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are

unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Push and hold the

RIGHT

arrow button when in this display until

“OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec.” appears to make

your selection.

Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped

When “On” is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to

“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And

Operating” for system function and operating informa-

tion. To make your selection, push and release the

RIGHT

arrow button until “On” or “Off” appears.

Display Units In

The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect GPS system units can

be changed between US and Metric.

Push and hold the RIGHT

arrow button when in

this display until “US” or “METRIC” appears to make

your selection.

Automatic Compass Calibration

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the

need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is

new, the compass may appear erratic, and the EVIC will

display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may

also calibrate the compass by completing one or more

360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or

metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in

the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function

normally.

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and

an environment free from large metallic objects such as

buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,

etc.

Manual Compass Calibration

If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator

does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the

compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:

1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order

to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.

2. Push and release the MENU button until the Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) menu

displays in the EVIC.

3. Push and release the DOWN

arrow button until

“Calibrate Compass” displays in the EVIC.

4. Push and release the RIGHT

arrow button to start

the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in

the EVIC.

5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area

free from large metal or metallic objects) until the

“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now

function normally.

Compass Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic

North and Geographic North. To compensate for the

differences, the variance should be set for the zone where

the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly

set, the compass will automatically compensate for the

differences and provide the most accurate compass head-

ing.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from

the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where

the compass sensor is located.

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Push and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-

mately two seconds.

3. Push and release the DOWN

arrow button until

“Compass Variance” message and the last variance

zone number displays in the EVIC.

4. Push and release the RIGHT

arrow button until

the proper variance zone is selected according to

the map.

5. Push and release the COMPASS button to exit.

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be

equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These

networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-

mation. This information allows systems and features in

your vehicle to function properly.

Compass Variance Map

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security

features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful

access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.

Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over

time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,

evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar

to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require

software updates to improve the usability and perfor-

mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of

unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-

tems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your

vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent

version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is

installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the

possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are

breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,

including safety related systems, could be im-

paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that

may result in an accident involving serious injury

or death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into

your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media

of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-

cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it

may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to

be breached.

• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-

havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized

dealer immediately.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

NOTE:

• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding

software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize

the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners

should:

• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-

update to learn about available Uconnect software

updates.

• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.

personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-

not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept

information and private communications without your

consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Di-

agnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining

Your Vehicle”.

UCONNECT 230 – AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND

6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX

JACK)

Uconnect 230

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the

radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second

time to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the

ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the

volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK Buttons

Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping, until you release it.

SCAN Button

Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for

the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if

equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each

listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop

the search, push the SCAN button a second time.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone — If

Equipped

Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature

(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further

details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With

Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio

screen.

Phone Button Uconnect Phone — If Equipped

Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature

(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” for further

details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With

Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio

screen.

TIME Button

Push the TIME button to alternate locations of the time

and frequency display.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes

will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con-

trol knob to save the time change.

5. To exit, push any button/knob or wait five seconds.

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button

and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in

this display follow the above procedure, starting at step

INFO Button

Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call

letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text

message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the

direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM

or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

TUNE Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second

time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third

time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth

time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the

sound level from the right or left side speakers.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time

and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between

the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to

exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSIC TYPE Button

Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type

mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button

or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast

Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following

format types:

Program Type

16-Digit Character Dis-

play

No program type or un-

defined

None

Adult Hits Adlt Hit

Classical Classicl

Classic Rock Cls Rock

College College

Country Country

Foreign Language Language

Information Inform

Jazz Jazz

News News

Nostalgia Nostalga

Oldies Oldies

Personality Persnlty

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Program Type

16-Digit Character Dis-

play

Public Public

Rhythm and Blues R & B

Religious Music Rel Musc

Religious Talk Rel Talk

Rock Rock

Soft Soft

Soft Rock Soft Rck

Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B

Sports Sports

Talk Talk

Top 40 Top 40

Weather Weather

By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is

displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency

station with the same selected Music Type name. The

Music Type function only operates when in the FM

mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUP Button

Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between

the following items:

NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll

through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to

select an entry and make changes.

• DVD Enter — When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,

selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current

highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll

up and down the menu (if equipped).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

• DISC Play/Pause —

You can toggle between playing the DVD and

pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT

button (if equipped).

• DVD Play Options — Selecting the DVD Play Options

will display the following:

• Subtitle — Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch

subtitles to different subtitle languages that are avail-

able on the disc (if equipped).

• Audio Stream — Repeatedly pressing SELECT will

switch to different audio languages (if supported on

the disc) (if equipped).

• Angle — Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the

viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if

equipped).

NOTE:

• The available selections for each of the above entries

varies depending upon the disc.

• These selections can only be made while playing a

DVD.

• VES Power — Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF (if

equipped).

• VES Lock — Locks out rear VES remote controls (if

equipped).

• VES CH1/CH2 — Allows the user to change the mode

of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by

pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).

• Set Home Clock — Pressing the SELECT button

allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to adjust the hours and then press and

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the

minutes. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again

to save changes.

• Player Defaults — Selecting this item will allow the

user to scroll through the following items and set

defaults according to customer preference.

Menu Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the

default startup DVD menu language (effective only if

language supported by disc). If you want to select a

language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙

Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the

number and then push to select.

Audio Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio

language (effective only if the language is supported by

the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling

down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using

the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down

to select the number and then push to select.

Subtitle Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle

language (effective only if the language is supported by

the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling

down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using

the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down

to select the number and then push to select.

Subtitles — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle

Off or On.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265

Audio DRC — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio

dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under

this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the

setting is ⬙Normal.⬙

Aspect Ratio — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide

screen, pan scan, and letter box.

AutoPlay — If Equipped

When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will

bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the

movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not

auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU

button on the remote control to select desired title to play.

NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before

loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after

a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the

defaults are effective only if the disc supports the

customer-preferred settings.

AM and FM Buttons

Push the buttons to select AM or FM mode.

SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The

symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station

and push and release that button. If a button is not

selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but-

ton, the station will continue to play but will not be

stored into pushbutton memory.

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push

the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display

window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in

both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,

and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into

pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2

memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton

twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you

commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12

Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

DISC Button

Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from

AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Operation Instructions — DISC Mode For CD And

MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD – Video

The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by

geographic region. These region codes must match for

the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does

not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it

will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle

to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the

player a maximum of five times.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267

CAUTION!

The radio may shut down during extremely hot condi-

tions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate “Disc

Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is reached.

This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the

DVD player and other radio internal components.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)

Push the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the

corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being

loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and

prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays

⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.

Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc

is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is

reading the disc.

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)

Push the EJECT button and the pushbutton

with the corresponding number (1-6) where the

CD was loaded and the disc will unload and

move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio

display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is

being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

Push and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all

CDs will be ejected from the radio.

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

SEEK Button (CD MODE)

Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the

CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning

of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the

previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK

button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in

CD and MP3/MWA modes.

SCAN Button (CD MODE)

Push the SCAN button to scan through each track on the

CD currently playing.

TIME Button (CD MODE)

Push this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF (CD MODE)

Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will

begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or

another CD button is pushed. The RW (Rewind) button

works in a similar manner.

AM Or FM Button (CD MODE)

Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.

Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files

The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable

MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.

When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the

following restrictions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the

radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,

DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of directory levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255

• Maximum number of folders: 100

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-

character extension)

• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-

character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/

WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep

disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession

discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/

WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.

If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and

MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/

WMA tracks on that disc.

Supported MP3/WMA File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA

extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files

named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-

back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file

as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.

270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio

data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling

frequencies in the following table are supported. In

addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The

majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate

and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specifi-

cation

Sampling Fre-

quency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48

WMA Specifi-

cation

Sampling Fre-

quency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

WMA 44.1 and 48 48, 64, 96, 128,

160, 192 VBR

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

supported.

Playback Of MP3/WMA Files

When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,

the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more

time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271

Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be

affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a

single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option

before writing to the disc.

LIST Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA Play

Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders

on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by

turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a

folder by pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will

begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the

next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain

playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFO Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA Play

Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through

the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File

Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed

time⬙ priority mode.

Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more

and radio will display song titles for each file.

Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds

to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.

272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which

allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an

MP3/WMA player, an ipod, or a microphone and utilize

the vehicles audio system to amplify the source and play

through the vehicle speakers.

Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-

iary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the

device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio

is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the

AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume

down.

SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Push the TIME button to change the display from elapsed

playing time to time of day. The time of day will display

for five seconds.

RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273

Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)

— If Equipped

Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.

Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If

Equipped

Refer to “Uconnect Phone” for further details.

Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment

System (VES) (If Equipped)

Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)” for further

details.

Dolby

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

Macrovision

This product incorporates copyright protection technol-

ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-

tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection

technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is

intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,

unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse

engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

DTS

“DTS and “DTS 2.0” are trademarks of Digital Theater

Systems, Inc.

Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-

ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to

coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite

Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,

274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-

dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has

limited coverage in Alaska.

System Activation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you

may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio

service that is included with the factory-installed satellite

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-

come kit that contains general information, including

how to setup your on-line listening account. For further

information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or

visit the Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at

www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when

calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID).

2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-

tion and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll

using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is

selected. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number

display will time out in two minutes. Push any button on

the radio to exit this screen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275

Selecting Uconnect (Satellite) Mode

Push the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A

CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio

mode.

Satellite Antenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the

roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects

placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause

decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as

bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within

the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly

on or above the antenna.

Reception Quality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the

following reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking

structure or under a physical obstacle.

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the

form of short audio mutes.

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can

cause intermittent reception.

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can

cause signal blockage.

Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)

Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or

ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEK Buttons

Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping, until you release it.

SCAN Button

Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for

the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-

tinuing to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN

button a second time.

INFO Button

Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-

tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-

able). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an

additional three seconds will make the radio display the

Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return

to normal display).

RW/FF

Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the

direction of the arrows.

TUNE Control (Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSIC TYPE Button

Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type

mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button

or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

lected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music

type.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277

By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type

function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next

channel with the same selected Music Type name.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

SETUP Button

Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the

following items:

• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/

SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This

number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the

Sirius subscription.

SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton

Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this

station and push and release that button. If a button is not

selected within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND

button, the station will continue to play but will not be

stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push

the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by

pushing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

UCONNECT 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF

EQUIPPED

Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual for detailed

operating instructions.

Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)

— If Equipped

Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.

Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If

Equipped

Refer to “Uconnect Phone” for further details.

UCONNECT 130

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

Uconnect 130

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the

radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second

time to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning

the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the

volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK Buttons

Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping, until you release it.

TIME Button

Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and

radio frequency.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes

will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con-

trol knob to save time change.

280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

RW/FF

Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the

direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either

AM or FM frequencies.

TUNE Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second

time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third

time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth

time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the

sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time

and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between

the front and rear speakers.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to

exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

AM/FM Button

Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton

Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto

this station and push and release that button. If a button

is not selected within five seconds after pushing the

SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but

will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push

the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by

pushing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM

stations).

DISC Button

Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from

AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And

MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position

to operate the radio.

• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),

recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact

discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and

multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD

label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into

the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the

radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than

1 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be

ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and

begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will

show the track number, and index time in minutes and

seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel

away and jam the player mechanism.

•

The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player. Do not

attempt to insert a second CD if one is already

loaded.

• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the

other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can

cause damage to the player.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283

EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD

Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,

the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)

SEEK Button

Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the

CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning

of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the

previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK

button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in

CD and MP3 modes.

TIME Button

Push this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD

player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or

RW or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse)

button operates in a similar manner.

AM/FM Button

Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.

284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Push this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the

compact disc in random order to provide an interesting

change of pace.

Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly

selected track.

Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3

file recording media and formats are limited. When

writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-

tions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255

• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file

names and folder names is limited. For large numbers

of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285

display the file name and folder name, and will assign

a number instead. With a maximum number of files,

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With

200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis-

play.)

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-

character extension)

• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-

character extension)

Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after

writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of

multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result

in longer disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-

sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to

an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files

use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rate.

286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MPEG Specifi-

cation

Sampling Fre-

quency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32,

24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

supported.

Playback Of MP3 Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the

radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more

time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected

by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a

single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option

before writing to the disc.

Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which

allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an

MP3 player, or iPod, and utilize the vehicle’s audio

system to amplify the source and play through the

vehicle speakers.

Pushing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to

auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the

device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is

not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX

audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Push this button to change the display to time of day. The

time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is

OFF).

UCONNECT 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO

Uconnect 130

288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the

radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second

time to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning

the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the

volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK Buttons

Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping, until you release it.

Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped

Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-

tures Of Your Vehicle”.

Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone — If

Equipped

Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature

(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Under-

standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With

Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio

screen.

Phone Button Uconnect Phone — If Equipped

Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature

(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Under-

standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With

Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio

screen.

TIME Button

Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and

radio frequency.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes

will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con-

trol knob to save time change.

5. To exit, push any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button.

For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, push the

SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select

SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,

290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite

radio, push the SETUP button and then follow the above

procedure, starting at step 2.

INFO Button

Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call

letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text

message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the

direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either

AM or FM frequencies.

TUNE Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second

time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third

time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth

time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the

sound level from the right or left side speakers.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time

and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between

the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to

exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSIC TYPE Button

Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type

mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button

or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast

Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following

format types:

Program Type

16-Digit Character

Display

No program type or un-

defined

None

Adult Hits Adlt Hit

Classical Classicl

Classic Rock Cls Rock

College College

Country Country

Foreign Language Language

Information Inform

Jazz Jazz

News News

Nostalgia Nostalga

Oldies Oldies

Personality Persnlty

292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Program Type

16-Digit Character

Display

Public Public

Rhythm and Blues R & B

Religious Music Rel Musc

Religious Talk Rel Talk

Rock Rock

Soft Soft

Soft Rock Soft Rck

Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B

Sports Sports

Talk Talk

Top 40 Top 40

Weather Weather

By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is

displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency

station with the same selected Music Type name. The

Music Type function only operates when in the FM

mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUP Button

Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between

the following items:

• Set Clock — Pushing the SELECT button will allow

you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the

TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the

hours, push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set

the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust

the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con-

trol knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

save time change.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293

AM/FM Button

Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton

Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this

station and push and release that button. If a button is not

selected within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND

button, the station will continue to play but will not be

stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push

the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by

pushing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM

stations).

DISC/AUX Button

Pushing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch

from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And

MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position

to operate the radio.

• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),

recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact

discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and

multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD

label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into

the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the

radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than

1 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be

ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and

begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will

show the track number, and index time in minutes and

seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel

away and jam the player mechanism.

• The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player. Do not

attempt to insert a second CD if one is already

loaded.

• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the

other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can

cause damage to the player.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295

EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD

Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,

the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)

SEEK Button

Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the

CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning

of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the

previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK

button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in

CD and MP3 modes.

TIME Button

Push this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will

begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or

another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button

works in a similar manner.

AM/FM Button

Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.

296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Push this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the

compact disc in random order to provide an interesting

change of pace.

Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly

selected track.

Push the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random

Play.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3

file recording media and formats are limited. When

writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-

tions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297

• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file

names and folder names is limited. For large numbers

of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

display the file name and folder name, and will assign

a number instead. With a maximum number of files,

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With

200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis-

play.)

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-

character extension)

• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-

character extension)

Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after

writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of

multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result

in longer disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-

sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to

an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files

use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rates.

298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MPEG Specifi-

cation

Sampling Fre-

quency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32,

24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

supported.

Playback Of MP3 Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the

radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more

time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected

by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a

single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option

before writing to the disc.

LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play

Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders

on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by

turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a

folder by pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will

begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the

next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain

playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play

Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through

the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File

Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed

time⬙ priority mode.

Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more

and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds

to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.

Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which

allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an

MP3 player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to

amplify the source and play through the vehicle speak-

ers.

Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-

iary device if the AUX jack is connected.

300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the

device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio

is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the

AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume

down.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Push this button to change the display to time of day. The

time of day will display for five seconds (when the

ignition is OFF).

Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-

ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to

coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite

Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,

sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-

dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has

limited coverage in Alaska.

System Activation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you

may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio

service that is included with the factory-installed satellite

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-

come kit that contains general information, including

how to setup your on-line listening account. For further

information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or

visit the Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at

www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when

calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID).

2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-

tion and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll

using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is

selected. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number

display will time out in two minutes. Push any button on

the radio to exit this screen.

Selecting Uconnect (Satellite) Mode

Push the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A

CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio

mode.

Satellite Antenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the

roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects

placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause

decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as

bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within

the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly

on or above the antenna.

Reception Quality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the

following reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking

structure or under a physical obstacle.

302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the

form of short audio mutes.

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can

cause intermittent reception.

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can

cause signal blockage.

Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)

Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or

ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEK Buttons

Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping, until you release it.

SCAN Button

Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for

the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-

tinuing to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN

button a second time.

INFO Button

Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-

tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-

able). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an

additional three seconds will make the radio display the

Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return

to normal display).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303

RW/FF

Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the

direction of the arrows.

TUNE Control (Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSIC TYPE Button

Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type

mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button

or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

lected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music

type.

By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type

function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next

channel with the same selected Music Type name.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

SETUP Button

Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the

following items:

• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/

SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This

number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the

Sirius subscription.

SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The

symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.

304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel

and push and release that button. If a button is not

selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but-

ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be

stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push

the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display

window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This

allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into

pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2

memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton

twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If

Equipped

Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Understanding The Fea-

tures Of Your Vehicle”.

iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be

plugged into the USB port, located in the center console

or glove compartment.

iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod

and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may

not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit

Apple’s website for software updates.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305

NOTE:

• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate

Uconnect Multimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod or

external USB device support capability.

• Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio

device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,

plays media, but does not use the iPod/MP3 control

feature to control the connected device.

Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device

Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external

USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port

which is located in the center console or glove compart-

ment.

Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to

the vehicle’s iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or

external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),

the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by

pushing radio switches, as described below.

AUX/USB Connector Ports

306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-

charged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/

MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.

Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/

MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.

Using This Feature

By using an external USB device to connect to the USB

port:

• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound

system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,

etc.) information on the radio display.

• The audio device can be controlled using the radio

buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.

• The audio device battery charges when plugged into

the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific

audio device).

Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device

Using Radio Buttons

To enter the iPod/USB/MP3 control mode and access a

connected audio device, either push the “AUX” button

on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say

⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod/USB/MP3

control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio

device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.

Play Mode

When switched to iPod/USB/MP3 control mode, the

iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play

mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio

faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB

device and display data:

• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or

previous track.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307

• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while

playing a track, skips to the next track or push the VR

button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙

• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,

will jump to the previous track in the list or push the

VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙

• Jump backward in the current track by pushing and

holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button

long enough will jump to the beginning of the current

track.

• Jump forward in the current track by pushing and

holding the FF >> button.

• A single push backward << RW or forward FF >> will

jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec-

onds.

• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the

previous or next track. Pushing the SEEK >> button

during play mode will jump to the next track in the

list, or push the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous

Track.⬙

• While a track is playing, push the INFO button to see

the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)

for that track. Pushing the INFO button again jumps to

the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens

have been viewed, the last INFO button push will go

back to the play mode screen on the radio.

• Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio

device mode to repeat the current playing track or

push the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat

Off.⬙

• Push the SCAN button to use iPod/USB/MP3 device

scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of

each track in the current list and then forward to the

next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the

desired track, when it is playing the track, push the

308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pushing the

<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous

and next tracks.

• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):

Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and

Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB

device, or push the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or

⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio

display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

List Or Browse Mode

During Play mode, pushing any of the buttons described

below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables

scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the

audio device.

TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in

a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device

or external USB device.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise

(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the

track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be

played is highlighted on the radio display, push the

TUNE control knob to select and start playing the

track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll

through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay

in updating the information on the radio display may

be noticeable.

During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in

“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of

the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise)

to get to the track faster.

In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as

shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external

USB device:

• Preset 1 – Playlists

• Preset 2 – Artists

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309

• Preset 3 – Albums

• Preset 4 – Genres

• Preset 5 – Audiobooks

• Preset 6 – Podcasts

Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on

the top line and the first item in that list on the second

line.

To exit List mode without selecting a track, push the

same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.

LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level

menu of the iPod or external USB device.

• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item

to be selected and push the TUNE control knob. This

will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio

device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired

track in that list. Not all iPod or external USB device

sub-menu levels are available on this system.

MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is

another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio

device.

CAUTION!

• Leaving the iPod or external USB device (or any

supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex-

treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam-

age the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s

guidelines.

• Placing items on the iPod or external USB device,

or connections to the iPod or external USB device

in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device

and/or to the connectors.

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!

Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB

device while driving. Failure to follow this warning

could result in an accident.

Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)

Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the

Uconnect phone system.

Refer to the Uconnect Radio Supplement for further

information on Bluetooth connectivity.

Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons

To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the

radio or push the VR

button and say “Bluetooth

Streaming Audio.”

Play Mode

When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can

start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but

some devices require the music to be initiated on the

device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect

phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the

Uconnect phone system, but just one can be selected and

played.

Selecting A Different Audio Device

1. Push the Phone

button to begin.

2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say

⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙

3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect

phone system to list the audio devices.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311

Next Track

Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR

button on

the radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next

music track on your cellular phone.

Previous Track

Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR

button

on the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the

previous music track on your cellular phone.

Browse

Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming

Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is

playing will display info.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear

surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to

access the switches.

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and

mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker

switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom

of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering

Wheel)

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch

between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/

CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand

control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in

each mode.

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next

listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch

will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control

will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-

grammed in the radio preset button.

CD Player

Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next

track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once

will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the

beginning of the previous track if it is within eight

seconds after the current track begins to play.

If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the

second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

The center button on the left side rocker switch has no

function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a

multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the

center button will select the next available CD in the

player.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following

precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the

surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,

wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-

ing the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,

or anti-static sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular

disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-

ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)

oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known

good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES

Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in

your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from

your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated

by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is

not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does

not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the

antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be

turned down or off during mobile device operation when

not using Uconnect (if equipped).

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to

make you comfortable in all types of weather.

Manual Heating And Air Conditioning

The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of

outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.

Blower Control

Rotate this control to regulate the

amount of air forced through the ven-

tilation system in any mode. The

blower speed increases as you move

the control to the right from the “O”

(OFF) position. There are seven blower

speeds.

Manual Temperature Controls

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

Temperature Control

Rotate this control to regulate the tem-

perature of the air inside the passenger

compartment. Rotating the dial left

into the blue area of the scale indicates

cooler temperatures, while rotating

right into the red area indicates

warmer temperatures.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower

than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser

located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt

or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind

the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front

fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,

reducing air conditioning performance.

Air Conditioning Control

Push this button to engage the Air

Conditioning. A light will illuminate

when the Air Conditioning system is

engaged. Rotating the dial left into the

blue area of the scale indicates cooler

temperatures, while rotating right into

the red area indicates warmer

temperatures.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage

until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.

• MAX A/C

For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation

buttons at the same time.

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• ECONOMY MODE

If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn

OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,

select Panel, Bi-Level or Floor mode and move the

temperature control to the desired temperature.

Mode Control (Air Direction)

Rotate this control to choose from sev-

eral patterns of air distribution. You

can select either a primary mode as

identified by the symbols on the con-

trol, or a blend of two of these modes.

The closer the setting is to a particular

symbol, the more air distribution you

receive from that mode.

• Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-

ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct

airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed

so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers

for maximum airflow to the rear.

• Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot,

there is a difference in temperature between the upper

and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor

outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during

sunny but cool conditions.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

• Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a

small amount flowing through the defrost and

side window demist outlets.

• Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side

window demist outlets. This setting works best in

cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the

windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort

while reducing moisture on the windshield.

• Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side

window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-

mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-

shield and side window defrosting.

NOTE:

• The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,

Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air

Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehu-

midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve

fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

• For information on operating the Rear Defrost, refer to

“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea-

tures Of Your Vehicle”.

• Recirculation Control

Pushing the Recirculation Control button will

put the system in recirculation mode. This can

be used when outside conditions such as

smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are pres-

ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the

control button to illuminate.

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make

the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.

Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp

weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,

because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select

the outside air position for maximum defogging.

• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging

when the recirculation button is pushed and the mode

control is set to panel or panel / floor.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-

ing the mode control selection.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK

position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Equipped

The Automatic Temperature Control system automati-

cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at

the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.

Automatic Temperature Controls

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

Automatic Operation

Operation of the system is quite simple.

1. Turn the Mode Control knob (right knob) and the

Blower Control knob (left knob) to AUTO.

NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat

occupants only.

2. Dial in the temperature you would

like the system to maintain by ro-

tating the Temperature Control

knob (center knob). Once the com-

fort level is selected, the system will

maintain that level automatically

using the heating system. Should

the desired comfort level require air

conditioning, the system will auto-

matically make the adjustment.

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply

allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting

the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the

system completely and closes the outside air intake.

The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the

average person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary.

NOTE:

• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime

without affecting automatic operation.

• Pushing the Air Conditioning Control button while in

AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button

to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates

that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the

air conditioning is not necessary.

• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than

expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located

in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind

the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front

fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,

reducing air conditioning performance.

Blower Control

For full automatic operation or for

automatic blower operation, turn the

blower knob to the AUTO position. In

manual mode there are seven blower

speeds that can be individual selected.

In off position the blower will shut off.

Manual Operation Override

This system offers a full complement of manual override

features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,

Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-

ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override

the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower

range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.

The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by

rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).

NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control

Operation Chart that follows for details.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to

change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control

knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.

• Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-

ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct

airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed

so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers

for maximum airflow to the rear.

• Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot,

there is a difference in temperature between the upper

and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor

outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during

sunny but cool conditions.

• Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a

small amount flowing through the defrost and

side window demist outlets.

• Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side

window demist outlets. This setting works best in

cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the

windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort

while reducing moisture on the windshield.

• Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side

window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-

mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-

shield and side window defrosting.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

• Air Conditioner Control

Push this button to turn on the air

conditioning during manual operation

only. When the air conditioning is

turned on, cool dehumidified air will

flow through the outlets selected with

the Mode control dial. Push this but-

ton a second time to turn OFF the air

conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when

manual compressor operation is selected.

• Recirculation Control

The system will automatically control recircu-

lation. However, pushing the Recirculation

Control button will put the system in recircu-

lation mode. This can be used when outside

conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity

are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in

the control button to illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK

position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.

• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may

lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation

mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to

improve window clearing. Recirculation will be dis-

abled automatically if these modes are selected.

• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows

to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,

push the Recirculation button to return to outside air.

Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured

interior air to condense on windows and hamper

visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow

Recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode.

Attempting to use the recirculation while in these

modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink

and then turn off.

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you

can temporarily put the system into Recirculation

Mode by pushing the Recirculation button. However,

under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,

the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When

these conditions are present, and the Recirculation

button is pushed, the indicator will flash and then turn

off. This tells you that you are unable to go into

Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the

system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first

move the Mode knob to Panel, Bi-Level, Mix, or Floor

and then push the Recirculation button. This feature

reduces the possibility of window fogging.

Operating Tips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for

suggested control settings for various weather condi-

tions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a

high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-

sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.

A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)

coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material

Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.

Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your

Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

Winter Operation

Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is

not recommended because it may cause window fogging.

Vacation Storage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service

(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air

conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the

fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility

of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed

by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor

mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and

provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes

a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to

fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.

NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for

long periods as fogging may occur.

Side Window Demisters

A side window demister outlet is located at each end of

the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct

air toward the side windows when the system is in the

FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at

the area of the windows through which you view the

outside mirrors.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the

windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves

collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they

enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In

winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,

slush, and snow.

A/C Air Filter — If Equipped

The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from

entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from

outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-

senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”

in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service

information or see your authorized dealer for service.

Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” in “Maintaining Your

Vehicle” for filter service intervals.

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................333

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......333

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....334

▫ Normal Starting.......................334

▫ Extreme Cold Weather

(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ................335

▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................335

▫ After Starting ........................335

䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .336

䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .336

▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission...........336

▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ..............338

▫ Downshifting ........................339

䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —

IF EQUIPPED .........................339

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............341

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .341

▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission —

If Equipped .........................341

▫ Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission

(CVT) — If Equipped...................348

䡵 AUTOSTICK ..........................353

▫ AutoStick (Six-Speed Automatic Transmission) —

If Equipped .........................353

▫ AutoStick (CVT) — If Equipped ...........355

䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................357

䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................357

䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ...............358

▫ When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The 4WD

Lock Lever Engaged — If Equipped ........359

▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ..........359

▫ Hill Climbing ........................361

▫ Driving Through Water .................364

▫ After Driving Off-Road .................366

䡵 POWER STEERING .....................367

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............368

䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................368

䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................371

䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .372

▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .372

▫ Brake System Warning Light..............372

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............372

▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light............374

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............375

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................375

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............378

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........379

330 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........384

▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .385

䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............386

▫ Tire Markings ........................386

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........390

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........392

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........393

䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........398

▫ Tire Pressure ........................398

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................399

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .401

▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................401

▫ Tire Types ...........................402

▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............404

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............404

▫ Tire Spinning ........................407

▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................408

▫ Life Of Tire .........................408

▫ Replacement Tires .....................409

䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......411

䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....411

䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS) ..............................412

▫ Base System .........................415

▫ Premium System — If Equipped ...........418

▫ General Information....................422

STARTING AND OPERATING 331

䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................422

▫ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine ...................422

▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................423

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............423

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......424

▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................424

▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................425

▫ Fuel System Cautions...................425

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............426

䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................427

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............427

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............429

䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................429

▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............429

䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................431

▫ Common Towing Definitions .............432

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............434

▫ Trailer Towing Weights

(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .........436

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............437

▫ Towing Requirements ..................438

▫ Towing Tips .........................442

䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................444

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .444

332 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both

inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-

sion into PARK, apply the parking brake and

remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When

leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,

press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift

lever in NEUTRAL.

NOTE:

• The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is

pressed to the floor.

• If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is

locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve

pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the

key.

STARTING AND OPERATING 333

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL

position before you can start the engine. Press the brake

pedal before shifting to any driving gear.

NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting

out of PARK.

Tip Start

Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch to

the START position and release it as soon as the starter

engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it

will disengage automatically when the engine is running.

If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage

automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the

ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15

seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Normal Starting

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does

not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position

and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to

start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the

OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the

“Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-

mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel

could enter the catalytic converter and once the

engine has started, ignite and damage the converter

and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,

booster cables may be used to obtain a start from

(Continued)

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if

done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully.

Refer to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emer-

gencies” for further information.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of

an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-

able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” and “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-

dures, it may be flooded. Press the accelerator pedal all

the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine

for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess

fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key

in the ON position, release the accelerator pedal and

repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the

throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start

the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing

serious personal injury.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the

engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to

15 seconds before trying again.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will

decrease as the engine warms up.

STARTING AND OPERATING 335

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits

quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a

standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a

grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one

hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater

cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt

electrical cord could cause electrocution.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

Five-Speed Manual Transmission

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the

vehicle unattended without having the parking

brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-

ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,

especially on an incline.

Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you

release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator

pedal.

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be

sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when

starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch

can result from starting in a gear higher than first gear.

CAUTION!

• Launching in any gear except 1st gear will result in

excessive slipping of the clutch and potentially

lugging or stalling the engine.

• Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a

gear. Be sure the transmission is in first gear, (not

third), when starting from a standing position.

Damage to the clutch can result from starting in a

gear higher than first gear.

For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only

the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light

accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.

Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,

and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch

pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear

on the clutch.

Shift Pattern

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a

complete stop.

NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission lu-

bricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift

efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmis-

sion.

Recommended Shift Speeds

To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel

economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following

table.

Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds

Units in mph (km/h)

Engine Size Acceleration

Rate

1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5

All Engines Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)

Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

Downshifting

Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and

prolong engine life.

CAUTION!

If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift

at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may

cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is

selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to

the clutch and the transmission can result from

skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting

at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal

is held pressed (i.e., not released).

To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift

down to second or first gear when descending a steep

grade.

When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,

downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-

dened.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-

ing precautions are not observed:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after

the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle

speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

STARTING AND OPERATING 339

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while

shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake,

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.

Once the key is removed, the transmission is

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-

wanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-

tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children). A child

could operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK

before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/

OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be re-

moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the

LOCK/OFF position, and once removed the transmission

is locked in PARK.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the

key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety

feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and

stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain

service.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK

unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission

out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the

ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake

pedal must be pressed.

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The transmission gear position display (located in the

instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.

You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever

out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-

lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift

lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred miles (kilometers).

STARTING AND OPERATING 341

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when

shifting between these gears.

The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can

be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to

“AutoStick” in this section). Moving the shift lever to the

left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will

manually select the transmission gear, and will display

the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the

vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the

transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking

brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on

the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-

cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added

precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill

grade.

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the

gear selector/shift lever out of PARK with the brake

pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in

PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake,

turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.

Once the key is removed, the transmission is

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-

wanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-

tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 343

WARNING! (Continued)

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children). A child

could operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the gear selector/shift lever out of

PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the

LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and

also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to

the gear selector/shift lever could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this

can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-

tion:

• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever

all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is

fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and

verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever

will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

344 STARTING AND OPERATING

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged

periods with the engine running. The engine may be

started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift

the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe

practices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other

reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause

severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”

for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-

shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,

third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive

sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-

ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

STARTING AND OPERATING 345

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as

when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-

tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or

while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick shift

control (refer to “AutoStick (Six-Speed Automatic Trans-

mission)” in this section for further information) to select

a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear

will improve performance and extend transmission life

by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-

ing limits, the transmission controller will modify the

transmission shift schedule and expand the range of

torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to

prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the

transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission

Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the

transmission may operate differently until the transmis-

sion cools down.

During very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below),

transmission operation may be modified depending on

engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle

speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-

sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for

abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could

result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains

in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is

selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue

to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be

illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be

driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-

aging the transmission.

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission

can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the

following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer detected, the transmission will return to normal

operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your

earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has

diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could

recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer

service is required.

Overdrive Operation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically

controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will

automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-

ditions are present:

• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.

• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-

perature.

• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-

ture.

• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.

• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.

STARTING AND OPERATING 347

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been

included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.

A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-

cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly

different feeling or response during normal operation in

the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during

some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE: Engagement of the torque converter clutch is

inhibited at very cold temperatures. Because the engine

speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not

engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting

into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. The torque

converter clutch will function normally once the trans-

mission is sufficiently warm.

Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission

(CVT) — If Equipped

The transmission gear position display (located in the

instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.

You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever

out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-

lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift

lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.

NOTE: The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmis-

sion (CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This

may sometimes ⬙feel⬙ as if it is slipping, but this is normal

and does not harm anything.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when

shifting between these gears.

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

The transmission shift lever only has PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can

be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to

⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section). Moving the shift lever to the

left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will

manually select from a set of predefined transmission

gear ratios, and will display the current gear in the

instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the

vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the

transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking

brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on

the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-

cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added

precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill

grade.

STARTING AND OPERATING 349

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the

gear selector/shift lever out of PARK with the brake

pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in

PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake,

turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.

Once the key is removed, the transmission is

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-

wanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-

tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

(Continued)

350 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children). A child

could operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the gear selector/shift lever out of

PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the

LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and

also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to

the gear selector/shift lever could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this

can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-

tion:

• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever

all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is

fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and

verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever

will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

STARTING AND OPERATING 351

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged

periods with the engine running. The engine may be

started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift

the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe

practices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other

reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause

severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”

for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the best fuel economy. The DRIVE

position provides optimum driving characteristics under

all normal operating conditions.

352 STARTING AND OPERATING

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as

when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-

tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or

while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick shift

control (if equipped, refer to “AutoStick (CVT)” in this

section for further information) to select a lower gear

ratio. Under these conditions, using a lower gear ratio

will improve performance and extend transmission life

by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During sustained high speed driving or trailer

towing up long grades on hot days, the auto-

matic transmission oil may become too hot. If

this happens, the transmission overheat indica-

tor light will come on, and the vehicle will slow slightly

until the transmission cools down enough to allow a

return to the requested speed. This is done to prevent

transmission damage due to overheating. If the high

speed is maintained, the overheating may reoccur, as

before, in a cyclic fashion.

AUTOSTICK

AutoStick (Six-Speed Automatic Transmission) —

If Equipped

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature

providing manual shift control, giving you more control

of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine

braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,

and improve overall vehicle performance. This system

can also provide you with more control during passing,

city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,

trailer towing, and many other situations.

Operation

When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the

transmission will operate automatically, shifting between

the six available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap

the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE

position. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will down-

shift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using

STARTING AND OPERATING 353

(+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear.

When AutoStick is active, the current transmission gear is

displayed in the instrument cluster.

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or

down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right

(+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed

condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear

until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as

described below:

• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-

essary to prevent engine over-speed.

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the

vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will

display the current gear.

• The transmission will automatically downshift to first

gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver

should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the

vehicle is accelerated.

• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.

Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second

gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in

snowy or icy conditions.

• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to

overspeed, that shift will not occur.

• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when

AutoStick is engaged.

• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a

fault or overheat condition is detected.

354 STARTING AND OPERATING

To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the shift lever to the

right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the instru-

ment cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick

mode at any time without taking your foot off the

accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their

grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

AutoStick (CVT) — If Equipped

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature

providing six manually selectable gear ratios, giving you

more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to

maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts

and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle perfor-

mance. This system can also provide you with more

control during passing, city driving, cold slippery condi-

tions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other

situations.

Operation

NOTE: AutoStick is not available until the CVT warms

up in cold weather.

When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, AutoStick

is activated by moving the shift lever side-to-side. Mov-

ing the shift lever to the right (+) will activate AutoStick

and shift up to the next higher manual ratio, unless you

are already operating in or near Overdrive, in which case

sixth gear ratio will be selected. In like manner, moving

the shift lever to the left (-) will activate AutoStick and

shift to the next lower manual ratio. The manually-

selected gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

STARTING AND OPERATING 355

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or

down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,

unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would

result. It will remain in the selected gear until another

upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described

below:

• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-

essary to prevent engine over-speed.

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the

vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will

display the current gear.

• The transmission will automatically downshift to first

gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver

should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the

vehicle is accelerated.

• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to

overspeed, that shift will not occur.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when

AutoStick is engaged.

• Heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) application will

disengage AutoStick mode.

• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a

fault or overheat condition is detected.

To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the shift lever to the

right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the instru-

ment cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick

mode at any time without taking your foot off the

accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their

grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

356 STARTING AND OPERATING

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF

EQUIPPED

This feature provides full time, on-demand, four–wheel

drive (4WD).

Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi-

tional traction is needed in sand, deep snow, or loose

traction surfaces, activate the “4WD LOCK” switch by

pulling up once and releasing. This locks the center

coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear

wheels. The “4WD Indicator Light” will come on in the

cluster. This can be done on the fly, at any vehicle speed.

To deactivate, simply pull on the switch one more time.

The “4WD Indicator Light” will then go out.

NOTE: Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in “Starting And Op-

erating” for further information.

ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a

narrower track to make them capable of performing in a

wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design

characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than

ordinary vehicles.

Four-Wheel Drive Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better

view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.

They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than

low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-

rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp

turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this

type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in

loss of control or vehicle rollover.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-

road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area

before proceeding. There are many types of surface

conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,

mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on

your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Control-

ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road

driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel

and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden

accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no

road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore

you will need to use your own good judgment on what is

safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always

be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in

terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while

remembering what you are currently driving over.

CAUTION!

Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other

combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle

exhaust system could cause a fire.

WARNING!

Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down

cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an

off-road situation.

358 STARTING AND OPERATING

When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The 4WD

Lock Lever Engaged — If Equipped

When driving off-road, shift into low (L Off-Road [if

equipped] ) and activate the 4WD LOCK. This will

provide additional traction and activates the numerous

off-road features to improve handling and control on

slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the sustained lower

gearing, low (L Off-Road [if equipped] ) with 4WD LOCK

engaged will allow the engine to operate in a higher

power range. This will allow you to cross over obstacles

and descend hills, with improved control and less effort.

NOTE: For maximum off-road performance, premium

fuel is recommended. While the vehicle will operate on

regular fuel when in L Off-Road mode (if equipped), the

engine has been calibrated for maximum performance

using premium fuel.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in

snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to

steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore, you

should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances

and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a

slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the

vehicle’s momentum.

Snow

In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at

slower speeds, activate the 4WD LOCK and shift the

transaxle to low (L Off-Road [if equipped] ) if necessary.

Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain

headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels

and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try

turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn

quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle. This

will allow the tires to get a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain

your momentum.

STARTING AND OPERATING 359

CAUTION!

On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high

engine RPM’s or vehicle speeds because engine brak-

ing may cause skidding and loss of control.

Mud

Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires

and is very difficult to get through. You should use low (L

Off-Road [if equipped] ) with the 4WD LOCK engaged

and maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to a

stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4

turn quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud

holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and

getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from

previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before

entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep

it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle

can be safely recovered if stuck.

Sand

Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire

pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail

maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The

key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire

pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneu-

vers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are

going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes,

reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103

kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. You should

use low (L Off-Road [if equipped] ) with the 4WD LOCK

engaged and ESC turned off. Reduced tire pressure will

drastically improve your traction and handling, while

driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to

normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other

hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the

tires prior to reducing the pressure.

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and

total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire

unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce

your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers.

Hill Climbing

Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-

standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.

Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep

to climb and should not be attempted. You should always

feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You

should always climb hills straight up and down. Never

attempt to climb a hill on an angle.

Before Climbing A Steep Hill

As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness.

Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction

is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?

What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,

branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely

recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If every-

thing looks good and you feel confident, then you should

use low (L Off-Road [if equipped]) with the 4WD LOCK

engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your

momentum as you climb the hill.

Driving Up Hill

Once you have determined your ability to proceed and

have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle

STARTING AND OPERATING 361

up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an

easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start

up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the

abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If

the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle

slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you

approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and

slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as

you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator

and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no

more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will

provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually

provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do

not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and

back straight down the grade using engine resistance

along with the vehicle brakes.

WARNING!

Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn

around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline

increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in

severe injury.

Driving Down Hill

Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if

it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface

traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow

controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight

descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill

to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel

confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you

are in low (L Off-Road [if equipped] ) with the 4WD

LOCK engaged and proceed with caution. Allow engine

362 STARTING AND OPERATING

and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply

your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!

Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use

vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.

Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose

control and be seriously injured or killed.

Driving Across An Incline

If at all possible avoid driving across an incline. If it is

necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across

an incline places more weight on the down-hill wheels,

which increases the possibilities of a down-hill slide or

rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with

firm and stable soils. If possible transverse the incline at

an angle heading slightly up or down.

WARNING!

Driving across an incline increases the risk of a

rollover, which may result in severe injury.

If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway

If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a

steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and

immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift

to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine

and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply

your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!

If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make

it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to

turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 363

WARNING! (Continued)

the vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always

back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear.

Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the

vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill,

always drive straight up or down.

Driving Through Water

Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.

Water crossings should be avoided if possible, and only

be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible man-

ner. You should only drive through areas which are

designated and approved. You should tread lightly and

avoid damage to the environment. You should know

your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if some-

thing goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a

vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested

water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do

not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested

water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You

want to use low (L Off-Road [if equipped] ) with the 4WD

LOCK engaged and proceed very slowly with a constant

slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light

throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate

through the crossing. After crossing any water higher

than the bottom of the axle differentials, you should

inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water inges-

tion.

CAUTION!

Water ingestion into the transaxle, transfer case,

engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too

fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause

permanent damage to engine, driveline or other

vehicle components and your brakes will be less

effective once wet and/or muddy.

364 STARTING AND OPERATING

Before You Cross Any Type Of Water

As you approach any type of water, you need to deter-

mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If neces-

sary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with

a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,

current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or

muddy waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure

you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you can

recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing

is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On

soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively increas-

ing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this

when determining the depth and the ability to safely

cross.

Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other

Standing Water

Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas

normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water

types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it

difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach

angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water

holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to

entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier

vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can

safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow

method.

CAUTION!

Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec-

tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.

STARTING AND OPERATING 365

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than

does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is

always a good idea to check for damage. That way you

can get any problems taken care of right away and have

your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.

Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and

exhaust system for damage.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as

required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on

the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-

pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the

values specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These

things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage

to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and

propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or

similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake

rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected

and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause

excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might

not have full braking power when you need it to

prevent a collision. If you have been operating your

vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked

and cleaned as necessary.

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in

mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for

impacted material. Impacted material can cause a

wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will

correct the situation.

POWER STEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical

steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will

still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-

tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering

effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during

parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel

travel are considered normal and do not indicate that

there is a problem with the power steering system.

• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-

ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.

This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it

does not in any way damage the steering system.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end

of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering

fluid temperature and it should be avoided when

possible. Damage to the power steering pump may

occur.

STARTING AND OPERATING 367

Power Steering Fluid Check

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined

service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are

apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-

pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-

rized dealer.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering

system as the chemicals can damage your power

steering components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and

with the engine off to prevent injury from moving

parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do

not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended

power steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all

surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking

brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an

automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission

in REVERSE or first gear.

368 STARTING AND OPERATING

The parking brake lever is located in the center console.

To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as

possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up

slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever

completely.

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition

switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in

the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic

transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning

Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime

will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking

brake before attempting to move the vehicle.

• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-

plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front

wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away

from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped

with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake

before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load

on the transmission locking mechanism may make it

Parking Brake

STARTING AND OPERATING 369

difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking

brake should always be applied whenever the driver is

not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key

Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or

injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-

mission in PARK, a manual transmission in RE-

VERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the

vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with

the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-

tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by

an authorized dealer immediately.

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as

standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for

any reason (for example, repeated brake applications

with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-

ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much

greater than that required with the power system oper-

ating.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or

riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-

bility, the remaining system will still function with some

loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident

by increased pedal travel during application and greater

pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the

malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake

fluid in the master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning

Light” will light.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on

is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking per-

formance or vehicle stability during braking may

occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or

will make your vehicle harder to control. You could

have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immedi-

ately.

STARTING AND OPERATING 371

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic

Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-

tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start

Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation

(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both

vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-

tions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill Descent

Control (HDC).

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

This function manages the distribution of the braking

torque between the front and rear axles by limiting

braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent

overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,

and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the

front axle.

Brake System Warning Light

The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when

the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may

stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or

comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system

is not functioning properly and that immediate service is

required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not

come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased

vehicle stability and brake performance under most

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

braking conditions. The system automatically prevents

wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the

ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started

and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight

clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.

ABS is activated during braking when the system detects

one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such

as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,

or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-

tion(s).

You also may experience the following when ABS acti-

vates:

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a

short time after the stop).

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.

• Brake pedal pulsations.

• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-

ment that may be susceptible to interference

caused by improperly installed or high output

radio transmitting equipment. This interference

can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-

bility. Installation of such equipment should be

performed by qualified professionals.

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish

their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just

press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to

slow down or stop.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 373

WARNING! (Continued)

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-

ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded

by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or

the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, following

another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-

cation may result in degraded ABS performance.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position

and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or

comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock

portion of the brake system is not functioning and that

service is required. However, the conventional brake

system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake

System Warning Light” is not on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake

system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore

the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake

Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position, have the light

repaired as soon as possible.

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking

capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The

system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-

ing the rate and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very

quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-

ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not

“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal

is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the

natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,

nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing

road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-

cluding those resulting from excessive speed in

turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-

planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a

complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases

the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue

to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver

STARTING AND OPERATING 375

does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the

system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will

roll down the hill as normal.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to

activate:

• The feature must be enabled.

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• Park brake must be off.

• Driver door must be closed.

• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction

(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle

backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward

gears. The system will not activate if the transmission

is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with

a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA

will remain active.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,

such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or

while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for

active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s

responsibility to be attentive to distance to other

vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly

brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-

hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-

tion is always required while driving to maintain

safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these

warnings can result in a collision or serious personal

injury.

376 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing With HSA

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back

while towing a trailer.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your

trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and

deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may

not be enough brake pressure to hold both the

vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake

pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an

incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-

tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake

pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the

parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.

Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the

vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide

with another vehicle, object or person, and cause

serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the

parking brake while parking on a hill and that the

driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

Disabling And Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 377

• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following steps:

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing

straight forward).

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Start the engine.

5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half

turn to the left.

6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch

bank below the climate control four times within

twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should

turn on and turn off two times.

7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an

additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then

back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-

pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will

blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.

9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to

its previous setting.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of

the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may

apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or

reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration

and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-

ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-

tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If

one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the

378 STARTING AND OPERATING

other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning

wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied

to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain

enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of

the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-

rects for over-steering or under-steering of the vehicle by

applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in

counteracting the over-steering or under-steering condi-

tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the

vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in

the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the

driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.

When the actual path does not match the intended path,

ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist

in counteracting the over-steer or under-steer condition

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-

vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by

prevailing road conditions.

• ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those re-

sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also

cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of

vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input

for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and

skillful driver can prevent collisions.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 379

WARNING! (Continued)

• The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others

•

Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-

tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-

teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect

the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the

steering system, suspension, braking system, tire

type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC

performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly

worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any

vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance

that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can

increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle

rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes

The ESC system has three available operating modes for

four–wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available

operating modes for two–wheel drive equipped vehicles.

Full On (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On (Two-Wheel

Drive Models)

This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever

the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this “On”

mode. This mode should be used for most driving

situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or

“ESC Off” for specific reasons as noted below.

Partial Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On (Two-

Wheel Drive Models)

This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the “ESC

Off” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion

of ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described in

the TCS section, has been disabled, and the ⬙ESC OFF

380 STARTING AND OPERATING

Indicator Light⬙ will be illuminated. All other stability

features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended

to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel

conditions, and more wheel spin than ESC would nor-

mally allow is required to gain traction.

To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off”

switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of

operation.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving

with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or

gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”

mode by pushing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-

tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”

mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily

pushing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while

the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of

ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in

the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off

Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-

tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is

disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered

by the ESC system is reduced. Trailer Sway control

(TSC) (if equipped) is disabled when the ESC system

is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.

Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use

when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu-

verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by

pushing and holding the “ESC Off” switch for five

seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is

running. After five seconds, the ⬙ESC OFF Indicator

STARTING AND OPERATING 381

Light⬙ will illuminate and the “ESC OFF” message will

appear in the odometer. Push and release the Trip Odom-

eter button located on the instrument cluster to clear this

message.

In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the “limited slip”

feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until

the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At

35 mph (56 km/h), the system returns to “Partial Off”

mode, as described above. TCS remains off. When the

vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h), the ESC

system shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds

so that it will not interfere with off-road driving however,

ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at

speeds above 35 mph (56 km/h). The ⬙ESC OFF Indicator

Light⬙ will always be illuminated when ESC is off.

To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off”

switch. This will restore the “ESC On” mode of operation.

NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an

audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed

into the PARK position from any other position, and then

moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if

the message was previously cleared.

WARNING!

In the ⴖFull Offⴖ mode, the engine torque reduction

and stability features are disabled. In an emergency

evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to

assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode is

intended for off-highway or off-road use only.

(Continued)

382 STARTING AND OPERATING

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And

ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/

RUN position. It should go out with the engine

running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this

light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the

vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at

speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem

diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-

cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as

the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also

flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-

celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little

throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and

driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-

mentarily each time the ignition switch is placed in the

ON/RUN position.

• Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN

position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was

cycled off previously, except for when the vehicle is

started while in 4L Range.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop

STARTING AND OPERATING 383

when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially

off or full off.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by

monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the

speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate

of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed

are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then

applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce

engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will

occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift

occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it

cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as

road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects

or other vehicles.

NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”

mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the

available ESC modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-

tions and driving conditions, influence the chance

that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot

prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those

that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects

or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-

equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-

less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the

user’s safety or the safety of others.

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

This system maintains vehicle speed while descending

hills during off-road driving situations. HDC will auto-

matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to

between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 6 mph (9 km/h) depending

on terrain. The system is activated by placing the vehicle

in “Off-Road” mode and placing the shift lever in LOW

or REVERSE. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Start-

ing And Operating” for further information.

When HDC is properly enabled, the “Hill

Decent Control Light” in the instrument cluster

will be illuminated.

HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only

activate when the vehicle is descending a hill. It will not

activate on level ground. If desired, HDC can be fully

deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESC “Full Off”

mode. This is done by pushing and holding the “ESC

Off” button for five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Stability

Control (ESC)” in this section of the manual.

HDC operation can be overridden with brake application

to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.

Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,

the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like

normal. When either the brake or the accelerator is

released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi-

nal set speed.

HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving. At

vehicle speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), HDC will no

longer function. If the “HDC Indicator Light” begins to

flash, this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and

the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool.

STARTING AND OPERATING 385

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-

ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver

must remain attentive to the driving conditions and

is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

386 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-

ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary

emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-

pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into

the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded

into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

STARTING AND OPERATING 387

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

TorS= Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or

– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

388 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to

its load index under certain operating conditions

– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under

specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and

posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

•

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

•

LL = Light load tire or

•

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure –

Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 389

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the

date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall

tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on

the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard

side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire

safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 03 means the 3rd week

390 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001

– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year

in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

STARTING AND OPERATING 391

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located

behind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after

the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three

hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per

square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible

cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation

pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-

sure

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure

as shown on the tire placard.

Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-

cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the

recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

392 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on

the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s

side door.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

STARTING AND OPERATING 393

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and

spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting

And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-

tion of this manual.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed

the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-

sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will

be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs

(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =

650 lbs [294 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in step 4.

STARTING AND OPERATING 395

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-

ing table shows examples on how to calculate total

load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your

vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-

ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration

purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating

and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

396 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING 397

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and

increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never

overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas

are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause collisions.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result

in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can

cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-

hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in

loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

(Continued)

398 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle

to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the

right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability

of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish

response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause

erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the

vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance

resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-

mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the

need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side

door.

STARTING AND OPERATING 399

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality

pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual

judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires

may look properly inflated even when they are under-

inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure

is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-

wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in

the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the

outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this

outside temperature condition.

400 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-

tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high

speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very

important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-

tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original

equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-

ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-

mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your

tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires

on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle

poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-

ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never

combine them with other types of tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING 401

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it

meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire

(sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and

additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have

experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-

diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and

service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,

Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary

between different all season tires. All season tires can be

identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on

the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry

conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or

on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be

aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold

driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle

when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if

roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-

tion, contact an authorized dealer.

402 STARTING AND OPERATING

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or

mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use

Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You

could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury

or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates

the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a

“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires

equivalent in size and type to the origi-

nal equipment tires. Use snow tires

only in sets of four; failure to do so

may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what

was originally equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to

original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold

tire inflation pressures.

STARTING AND OPERATING 403

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid

and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-

hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be

checked before using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles

(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation

pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the

Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire

inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a

Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited

driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-

ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full

capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat

mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-

mation.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit

instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in

“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take

your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a

compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

404 STARTING AND OPERATING

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And

Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and

wheel equivalent in look and function to the original

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle

of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire

rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,

refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended

tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.

You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a

compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on

the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the

driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”

or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/

80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-

ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled

on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a

conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the

wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire and

wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emergency use

only. With these spares, do not drive more than

50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited

tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear

indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 405

WARNING! (Continued)

replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which

apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in

spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.

This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the

front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare

tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn

to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size

spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency

use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the

limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving

limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-

stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle

handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the

speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep

(Continued)

406 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on

your Tire and Loading Information Placard located

on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the

driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original

equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it

on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss

of vehicle control.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or

for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-

age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-

one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-

ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 407

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to

help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is

worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be

replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for

further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying

factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures

can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the

tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce

tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-

ment.

• Distance driven.

Tire Tread

1—WornTire

2—NewTire

408 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or

higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced

tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-

tenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to

follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have a collision resulting

in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact

with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-

facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-

lent to the originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for

the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and

Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original

equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-

ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of

this manual for more information relating to the Load

Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two

rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously

affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a

wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match

those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire

dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions

STARTING AND OPERATING 409

you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure

to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect

the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations

of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-

pension dimensions and performance characteris-

tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and

braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-

able handling and stress to steering and suspen-

sion components. You could lose control and have

a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use

only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings

approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally equipped

on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load

index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size

may result in false speedometer and odometer read-

ings.

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices

are not recommended.

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are

used.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at

different loads and perform different steering, driving,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain

mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a

smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or

unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being

performed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 411

The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”

shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern

does not apply to some directional tires that must not be

reversed.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the

driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-

mended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1

psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when

the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will

decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on

“cold inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire

pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least

three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a

three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must

not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into

the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”

in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to

properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will

Tire Rotation

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and

there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-

sure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if

the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning

limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or

natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire

pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended

cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-

ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,

you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended

cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will

automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the

updated tire pressures.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive

this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended

cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure

of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F

(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),

a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire

pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire

pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle

may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27

psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure

STARTING AND OPERATING 413

Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the

tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold

placard pressure value.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-

eration or sensor damage may result when using

replacement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-

come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire

sealant it is recommended that you take your

vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your

sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure

or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge

while adjusting your tire pressure.

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even

if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger

illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in

the tire.

Base System

This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the

instrument cluster.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim

mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-

els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve

stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver

Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module.

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

STARTING AND OPERATING 415

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-

nate in the instrument cluster, a LOW TIRE message will

be displayed for a minimum of five seconds, and an

audible chime will be activated when one or more of the

four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur,

you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation

pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire

to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure

value. The system will automatically update and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW

TIRE message will turn off once the updated tire pres-

sures have been received.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

Check TPMS Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on

and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system

fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a

chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will

repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the

fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur

with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPM sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare

wheel and tire assembly.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure

monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-

tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road

tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-

ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

and LOW TIRE message will still turn ON due to the

low tire.

3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min-

utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare

tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as

long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure

warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to

receive this information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 417

Premium System — If Equipped

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim

mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-

els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve

stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver

module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain

the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four

wheel wells)

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,

which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-

nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will

be activated when one or more of the four active road tire

pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once

every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects.

In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE” text

message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of

the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four

active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible

and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic

display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-

sure value. The system will automatically update, the

“LOW TIRE” text message will no longer be displayed,

the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop

flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will

extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been

received.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

Service TPMS Message

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on

and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a

system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound

a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-

TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text

message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“

Tire Pressure Monitoring Display

STARTING AND OPERATING 419

in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire

Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault

no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙

text message will not be present, and a pressure value

will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can

occur with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPM sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙

message for a minimum of five seconds when a system

fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is

detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙

message is then followed with a graphic display with

Tire Pressure Monitoring Display

420 STARTING AND OPERATING

pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-

sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors

but they may not be located in the correct vehicle

position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as

the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare

wheel and tire assembly.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure

monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-

tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road

tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-

ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will still turn ON due to the low tire. The “LOW TIRE”

text message and the graphic with the low tire pres-

sure flashing will be displayed.

3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min-

utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the

EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-

sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display

dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and

then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure

values.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare

tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as

STARTING AND OPERATING 421

long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure

warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to

receive this information.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

2.0L And 2.4L Engine

These engines are designed to meet all

emissions regulations and provide opti-

mum fuel economy and performance

when using high quality unleaded “Regu-

lar” gasoline having a posted octane num-

ber of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of

higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it

will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in

these engines.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of

87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not

a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard

making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower

than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-

ering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner

burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-

cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-

prove air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-

erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-

proved performance and durability of engine and fuel

system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-

genates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-

line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of

these blends may result in starting and drivability

problems, damage critical fuel system components,

cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,

and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to

illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they

should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater

than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more

than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are

not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or

not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

STARTING AND OPERATING 423

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-

line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with

higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-

ited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85

fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)

is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline

blended with MMT provides no performance advantage

beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug

life and reduces emissions system performance in some

vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline

without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content

of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether

the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal

and California reformulated gasoline.

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane

rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and

stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines

that have these additives will help improve fuel

economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-

mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con-

tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in

minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-

able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-

mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should

be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum

and varnish removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket

and diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:

• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal

law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-

formance and damage the emissions control sys-

tem.

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune

or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-

vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service

assistance.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 425

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being

sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

Most of these products contain high concentrations

of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-

mance problems resulting from the use of such

fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the

manufacturer and may void or not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control

system can result in civil penalties being assessed against

you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can

kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as

a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period. If the

vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine

running for more than a short period, adjust the

ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into

the vehicle.

(Continued)

426 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-

tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every

time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal

conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive

with all side windows fully open.

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side

of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure

the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable

over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the

gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s

surface.

Fuel Filler Cap

STARTING AND OPERATING 427

CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control

system could result from using an improper fuel

tank filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let

impurities into the fuel system.

• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the

vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is

being filled.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is

in violation of most state and federal fire regula-

tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You

could be burned. Always place gas containers on

the ground while filling.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank

is full.

• Tighten the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear one

click. This is an indication that cap is properly tight-

ened.

428 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will

come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time

the vehicle is refueled.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “gASCAP”

message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odom-

eter in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Warning And

Indicator Lights” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap

properly and push the odometer/trip odometer RESET

button to turn the message off. If the problem continues,

the message will appear the next time the vehicle is

started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Main-

taining Your Vehicle” for further information.

VEHICLE LOADING

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label

affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to

the driver’s door B-Pillar.

The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer

• Month and year of manufacture

• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Type of Vehicle

• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

STARTING AND OPERATING 429

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total

load must be limited so that you do not exceed the

GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents

the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires

must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size

listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for

all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight

of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo

loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a

commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are

added.

Overloading

The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,

etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as

long as you do not exceed the GVWR.

430 STARTING AND OPERATING

The best way to figure out the total weight of your

vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for

operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that

it is not over the GVWR.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and

shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension compo-

nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty

weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you

distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all

loose items securely before driving. Improper weight

distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your

vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes

operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or

it can change the way your vehicle handles. This

could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information

on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do

with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully

review this information to tow your load as efficiently

and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,

follow the requirements and recommendations in this

manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

STARTING AND OPERATING 431

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist

you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue

weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not

exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle

Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all

cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-

porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and

ready for operation⬙ condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your

fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight

of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

and trailer when weighed in combination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-

tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further

information.

432 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum

front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition

can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose

control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the

hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of

the load on your vehicle.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the

maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be

installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue

that typically provides adjustable friction associated with

the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer

swaying motions while traveling.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue

weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or

some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds

of hitches are the most popular on the market today and

they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized

trailers.

STARTING AND OPERATING 433

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-

age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used

for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the

tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used

in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-

vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent

steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing

safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control

also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and

contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.

Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load

equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue

Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle

and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch

system may reduce handling, stability, braking

performance, and could result in a collision.

• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-

ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your

hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-

reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.

Trailer Hitch Classification

The following chart provides the industry standard for

the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can

tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the

correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

434 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards

Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)

Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)

Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer

Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 435

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area

Maximum GTW

(Gross Trailer Wt.)

Maximum Tongue

Wt. (See Note)

2.0L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

2.4L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

2.4L Auto/Man with Trailer Tow Prep

Package (AHC)

32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)

2.4L Auto With Freedom Drive II Off Road

Package (AWL)

32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as

part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and

should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire

and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety

Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further

information.

436 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on

your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment

put in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the

trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional

factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must

be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.

Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for

the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo

for your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 437

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your vehicle drivetrain

components, the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle

or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a

trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)

and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps

the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at

the heavier loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance

Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further

information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the

GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these

guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as

possible:

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer

and will not shift during travel. When trailering

cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts

can occur that may be difficult for the driver to

control. You could lose control of your vehicle and

have a collision.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can

cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-

age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,

suspension, chassis structure or tires.

(Continued)

438 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to

the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.

Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow

enough slack for turning corners.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a

grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on

the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic

transmission in PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the

trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow

vehicle and the trailer such that the following four

ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-

lized.

Towing Requirements — Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact

spare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe

and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to

“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-

ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-

sures before trailer usage.

STARTING AND OPERATING 439

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage

before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General

Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the

proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-

mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper

tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a

higher load carrying capacity will not increase the

vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or

vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.

This could cause inadequate braking and possible

personal injury.

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

required when towing a trailer with electronically

actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with

a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic

brake controller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over

1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of

2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s

hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake

system and cause it to fail. You might not have

brakes when you need them and could have a

collision.

• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping

distance. When towing you should allow for addi-

tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a

collision.

(Continued)

440 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

loaded, it should have its own brakes and they

should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this

could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher

brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,

stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for

motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-

pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-

ness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles

wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.

Refer to the following illustrations.

Four-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins

2 — Male Pin

3 — Ground

4 — Park

5 — Left Stop/Turn

6 — Right Stop/Turn

STARTING AND OPERATING 441

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,

and backing up the trailer in an area located away from

heavy traffic.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,

all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch

slippage.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-

ever, if frequent shifting or changes in engine speed occur

while in this range, use the AutoStick shift control (if

equipped) to select a lower gear ratio.

Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Battery

2 — Backup Lamps

3 — Right Stop/Turn

4 — Electric Brakes

5 — Ground

6 — Left Stop/Turn

7 — Running Lamps

442 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• Using a lower gear ratio while operating the vehicle

under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor-

mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-

sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also

provide better engine braking.

•

If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45

minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans-

mission fluid and filter as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet,

or frequent trailer towing⬙. Refer to the ⬙Maintenance

Schedule⬙ for the proper maintenance intervals.

AutoStick — If Equipped

When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest

gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids

frequent downshifts. For example, choose ⬙4⬙ if the

desired speed can be maintained. Choose ⬙3⬙ or ⬙2⬙ if

needed to maintain the desired speed.

To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous

driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary

to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a

higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road

conditions allow.

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed

drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until

you can get back to cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to

maximize fuel efficiency.

STARTING AND OPERATING 443

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-

heating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-

mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission

Flat Tow None

• Transmission in NEU-

TRAL

• Key in ACC Position

NOT ALLOWED

Dolly Tow Front FWD Models ONLY FWD Models ONLY

Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer All OK OK

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow

applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and

provincial Highway Safety offices for additional de-

tails.

• Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be

recreational towed (flat towed) at any legal highway

speed, for any distance, if the manual transmission is

in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC

position.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an

automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain

will result. If these vehicles require towing, make

sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.

• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Internal

damage to the transmission or transfer case will

occur if a dolly is used when recreational towing.

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........449

䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............449

䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS ......................450

▫ Torque Specifications ..................451

䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........452

▫ Jack Location ........................453

▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................453

▫ Preparations For Jacking ................454

▫ Jacking Instructions ...................454

▫ Road Tire Installation ...................461

䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........463

▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................464

▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .464

▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .........465

▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit ........468

䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........474

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............475

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................476

䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............478

䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............480

䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........481

▫ With Ignition Key .....................483

448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the

instrument panel below the climate controls.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to

turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not

be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for

other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even

though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers

may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-

tion.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission

in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down

an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C

system adds heat to the engine cooling system and

turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum

heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control

to high. This allows the heater core to act as a

supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat

from the engine cooling system.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,

the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When

safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at

idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the

pointer drops back into the normal range. If the

pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a

minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure

that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any

time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the

vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a

properly calibrated torque wrench.

450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/

Bolt Size

Lug Nut/

Bolt

Socket

Size

100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.5 19 mm

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug

nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before

tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting

the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each

nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

Wheel Mounting Surface

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 451

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be

sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated

against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in personal injury.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

(Continued)

Torque Patterns

452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is

on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only. The jack should not be used to

lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle

should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

Jack Location

The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor

in the cargo area.

Spare Tire Stowage

The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor

in the cargo area.

Spare Tire Removal

Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.

Spare Tire And Jack Stowage

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or

slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the gear selector in PARK (automatic transmis-

sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).

5. Turn OFF the ignition.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposite of the jacking position. For ex-

ample, if changing the right front tire,

block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the

vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your

vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible before raising the

vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

(Continued)

454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in

REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a

jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If

you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a

service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for

lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

Instructions for this vehicle.

Jack Warning Label

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455

NOTE: Refer to “Tires — General Information” in “Start-

ing And Operating” for further information about the

spare tire, it’s use, and operation.

1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the

spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the

left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench

from the jack assembly.

NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack

with two attachment points. When the jack is partially

expanded, the tension between the two attachment

points holds the jack handle in place.

2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning

them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the

ground.

Removing Jack Handle From Jack

456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each

side of the body. The front locations are outlined by two

triangular cutouts on one of the flanges in the sill flange

assembly. The rear location is the same but with two

rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped with plastic

trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking

locations in the body.

Jacking Locations

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated.

Front Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Location

458 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is

securely engaged.

3. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be

placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is

positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the

jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest

to the wheel to be changed.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make

the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and

hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough

to remove the tire.

4. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning

the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until

the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is

obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift

provides maximum stability.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel

covers, where applicable, off the hub. Install the spare

wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the

nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle

has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in serious injury.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem

facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the

spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

WARNING!

To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel

covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp

edges.

NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the

wheel nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, prop-

erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the

wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.

6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.

7. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until

each lug nut has been tightened twice. Refer to

“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug

nut torque.

Mounting Spare Tire

460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is

free. Release the parking brake. Reassemble the lug

wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire

area. Secure the assembly using the means provided.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-

hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in

the places provided.

9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the

tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.

WARNING!

A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop

could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the

deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.

10. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.

Correct the tire pressure as required.

11. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with

a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are

properly seated against the wheel.

Road Tire Installation

Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the

valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand. Do

not use a hammer or excessive force to install the

cover.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461

3. Install the five wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped

end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the

lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in serious injury.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

5. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this sec-

tion for correct lug nut torque.

Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap

1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover

2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel

3 — Wheel Lug Nut

462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a

torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly

seated against the wheel.

Vehicles Without Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped

end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the

lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in serious injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this sec-

tion for correct lug nut torque.

5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a

torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly

seated against the wheel.

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread

can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,

screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire

Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to

approximately -4°F (-20°C).

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you

to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a

maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463

Tire Service Kit Storage

The Tire Service Kit is located under the load floor in the

cargo area.

Tire Service Kit Components And Operation

Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob

2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)

4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom

side of the Tire Service Kit)

464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses

Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following

symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.

Selecting Air Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this

position for air pump operation only. Use the

Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.

Selecting Sealant Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this

position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and

to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)

when selecting this mode.

Using The Power Button

Push and release the Power Button (4) once to

turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power

Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.

Using The Deflation Button

Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air

pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions

• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and

Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at

the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to

assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to

“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)

“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465

• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one

tire application use and need to be replaced after each

use. Always replace these components immediately at

your original equipment vehicle dealer.

• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,

clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material

from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once

the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and

properly discarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem

on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire

Service Kit.

• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate

bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,

located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the

bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,

or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air

Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob

(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to

avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit

Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4

inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.

• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.

Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location

466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the

vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the

road to avoid the danger of being hit when using

the Tire Service Kit.

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle

under the following circumstances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately

1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

– If the tire has any sidewall damage.

– If the tire has any damage from driving with

extremely low tire pressure.

– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat

tire.

– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or

the wheel.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or

heat source.

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants

of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in

the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to

you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service

Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.

Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,

swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes

skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-

ately with plenty of water if there is any contact

with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as

possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467

WARNING! (Continued)

• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In

case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-

sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of

reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-

diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of

water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician

immediately.

Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit

(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s

Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the

deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.

This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to

reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat

on the ground. This will provide the best positioning

of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated

tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as

necessary to place the valve stem in this position

before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or

in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition

in the OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake.

(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the

Sealant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap

from the fitting at the end of the hose.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the

deflated tire.

468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw

the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the

valve stem.

5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the

vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or

nails) from the tire.

Deflated Tire:

• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire

Service Kit.

NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the

parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEU-

TRAL.

• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white

fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the

Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.

NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the

tire.

If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10

seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service

Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve

stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.

Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.

Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant

Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power

Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt

power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if

available. Make sure the engine is running before

turning ON the Tire Service Kit.

3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous

use. Call for assistance.

NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and

the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air

Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the

Sealant Hose (6):

1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no

longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70

seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant

Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70

psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease

quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the

actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is

empty.

2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-

ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to

operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure

indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side

latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire

pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)

pressure within 15 minutes:

• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-

tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-

mended inflation pressure before continuing.

470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at

least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service

Kit.

2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the

Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-

ment panel.

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the

valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of

the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle

storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-

hicle.”

CAUTION!

• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get

hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.

• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end

of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-

tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-

rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal

Tire Service Kit components which may cause

permanent damage to the kit.

(D) Drive Vehicle:

Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,

drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure

distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.

Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.

Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after

using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90

km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to

follow this warning can result in injuries that are

serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others

around you.

(E) After Driving:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop

to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air

Mode position.

2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the

vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and

screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve

stem.

4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure

Gauge (3).

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit

and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire

and loading information label on the driver-side door

opening.

NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-

tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-

mended inflation pressure before continuing.

472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,

reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12

Volt outlet.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in

the vehicle.

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the

earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire

service center.

5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument

panel after the tire has been repaired.

6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)

assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-

sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-

ment”.

NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-

rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed

using the Tire Service Kit.

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).

2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the

recessed area under the sealant bottle.

3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant

Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose

of it accordingly.

4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit

housing.

5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so

that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in

the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the

housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the

bottle is locked into place.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end

of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its

storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).

7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the

vehicle.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-

started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in

another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster

pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly

so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack

follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and

precautions.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any

other booster source with a system voltage greater

than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,

alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the

engine compartment below the air intake duct. To access

the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two

finger screws, located on the radiator support.

Air Intake Finger Screws

Positive Battery Post

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-

ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the

ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by

moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch

bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent

electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is

flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or

sparks away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK (manual transmission to NEUTRAL) and

turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-

cal accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park

the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the

parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this

could establish a ground connection and personal

injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could

result in personal injury or property damage due to

battery explosion.

476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in

damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle

or the discharged vehicle.

NOTE: Remove Air Intake before proceeding with this

Jump-Starting procedure.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the

positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of

the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)

post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-

cal spark could cause the battery to explode and

could result in personal injury. Only use the specific

ground point, do not use any other exposed metal

parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then

start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables

in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable

from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-

charged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable

from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the

discharged battery.

5. Reinstall the air intake duct.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle

you should have the battery and charging system in-

spected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets

draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not

in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough without engine operation,

the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to

degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from

starting.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it

can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the

steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the

front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE

478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear

and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently

pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accel-

erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking

motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the

engine.

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to

transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-

gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at

least one minute after every five rocking-motion

cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce

the risk of clutch or transmission failure during

prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,

before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake

Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-

mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC

Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-

tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin

the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-

train damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels

above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-

mission shifting occurring).

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or

even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-

cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for

longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be

moved out of the PARK position, you can use the

following procedure to temporarily move the gear selec-

tor:

1. Turn the engine OFF.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the

gear selector override access cover (located on the

right side of the gear selector housing).

4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN

position, but do not start the engine.

5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

Gear Selector Override Access Cover

480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access

port, and push and hold the override release lever

forward.

7. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.

8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

9. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled

vehicle using a commercial towing service.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481

Towing Con-

dition

Wheels OFF

the Ground

Manual

Transmission

6-Speed Automatic

(FWD Only)

6-Speed Automatic

4WD

CVT Auto-

matic Trans-

mission

Flat Tow NONE

• Transmis-

sion in

NEUTRAL

• Key in

ACC or

ON/RUN

position

If transmission is

operable:

• Transmission in

NEUTRAL

• 25 mph

(40 km/h) max

speed

• 15 miles (24 km)

max distance

If transmission is

operable:

• Transmission in

NEUTRAL

• 25 mph

(40 km/h) max

speed

• 15 miles (24 km)

max distance

NOT

ALLOWED

Wheel Lift or

Dolly Tow

Rear NOT AL-

LOWED

NOT ALLOWED NOT

ALLOWED

Front FWD Models

ONLY

OK NOT ALLOWED FWD Models

ONLY

Flatbed ALL BEST

METHOD

BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST

METHOD

482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

With Ignition Key

Automatic Transmission

• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with

the front wheels elevated, or on a flatbed truck (all four

wheels OFF the ground).

• Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles can be towed on a

flatbed truck (all four wheels OFF the ground).

If the transmission is operable, Front Wheel Drive (FWD)

and Four Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles, with the 6-speed

automatic transmission only ( NOT the Continuously

Variable automatic transmission [CVT]), may be flat

towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the

following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.

• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).

Front Wheel Drive (FWD) models (with 6-speed auto-

matic only) may also be towed (under the same limita-

tions shown above) with the rear wheels elevated.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a

CVT automatic transmission. Damage to the drive-

train will result. If these vehicles require towing,

make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission and/or

transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-

ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty..

If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Gear

Selector Override” in this section for instructions on

shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for

towing.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483

Manual Transmission

• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) or Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

vehicles can be flat towed (all four wheels on the

ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.

• FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels

elevated.

• FWD or 4WD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck

(all wheels OFF the ground).

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition

is related to the clutch, transmission or driveline.

Additional damage to the drivetrain could result.

•

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-

ments can cause severe engine, transmission, or

drivetrain damage. Damage from improper towing is

not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

All Transmissions

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)

while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN

position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-

mission remains in NEUTRAL.

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.

Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not

attach to front or rear suspension components.

Damage to your vehicle may result from improper

towing.

484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Without The Ignition Key

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed

with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only

approved method of towing without the ignition key is

with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-

sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L ..........489

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ..........490

䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .491

▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity ........................491

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............492

䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS ..........................493

䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................494

䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................495

䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........495

▫ Engine Oil ..........................496

▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................499

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................499

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............500

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............501

▫ Body Lubrication .....................504

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............504

▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................505

▫ Exhaust System ......................505

▫ Cooling System ......................508

▫ Brake System ........................514

▫ Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) — If

Equipped ...........................516

▫ Automatic Transmission (CVT) —

If Equipped .........................518

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......519

▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) — AWD/4WD

Models Only ........................520

▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) — AWD/4WD Models

Only ..............................521

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion ...........................521

䡵 FUSES ..............................528

▫ Integrated Power Module (IPM) ...........529

䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................534

䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................534

䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................535

▫ Headlamps .........................535

▫ Fog Lamps ..........................536

▫ Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp ........536

▫ License Lamps .......................537

▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp ..........537

䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................537

䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE

PARTS ..............................538

▫ Engine .............................538

▫ Chassis ............................540

488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L

1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap

3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap

3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard

diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic

transmission control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent

performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-

sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It

will also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-

though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as

soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emission control system. It

could also affect fuel economy and driveability.

The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss

will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic

system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to

information related to the performance of your emissions

controls. Authorized service technicians may need to

access this information to assist with the diagnosis and

service of your vehicle and emissions system.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-

nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in

order to diagnose or service your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the

OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior

tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems, including

safety related systems, could be impaired or a

loss of vehicle control could occur that may result

in an accident involving serious injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access, information

stored in your vehicle systems, including per-

sonal information.

For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s

Manual on the DVD.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can

determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or

improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be dis-

played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until

a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the

gas cap is properly tightened. Push the trip odometer

RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem

persists, the message will appear the next time the

vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If

the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will

turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL

light off.

492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II

system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II

system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-

ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which

you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if

your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the

following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do

not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to

start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON

position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb

check.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then

return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should

not proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully

illuminated until you place the ignition in the off

position or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed

to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your

authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive your

vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the above test routine

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is

ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal

vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine

running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled

maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-

sure the designed performance. Damage or failures

caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance

and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-

nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service

operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

available which include detailed service information for

your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before

attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems may void your warranty and could result in civil

penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you

have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you

have any doubt about your ability to perform a service

job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance

services determined by the engineers who designed your

vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed

“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components

which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary could

result in more costly repairs, damage to other

components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-

mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions

examined by an authorized dealer or qualified

repair center.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of your

vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-

vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-

nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,

transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-

tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing

procedure.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must

be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to

check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a

fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level

before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will

give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and

only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of

the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the

range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will

consist of a crosshatch zone which depicts the MIN at the

low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the

range. Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is

at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil

level at the full end of the indicator range.

496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine

will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil

pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This

could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill

cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-

tion.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all

types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only

recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet

the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Identification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has

been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). The

manufacturer only recommends

API Certified engine oils.

This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-

20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en-

gine oils.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the

chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L, 2.4L

Engine

MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material

Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or

equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-

tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting

and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

ment” in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-

mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-

mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes

are followed.

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine

oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade

number should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-

dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to

the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its

performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-

tives.

498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil

filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscrimi-

nately discarded, can present a problem to the environment.

Contact your authorized dealer, service station or govern-

mental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil

filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter

at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil

filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality

of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high

quality filters should be used to assure most efficient

service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil

filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-

nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance

intervals.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can

provide a measure of protection in the case of engine

backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary

for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

near the engine compartment before starting the

vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters

varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air

cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-

mended.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-

tenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-

diately with large amounts of water. Refer to

“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use

a booster battery or any other booster source with

an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands

after handling.

• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that

should not be disconnected and should only be

replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the

positive post and the negative cable is attached to

the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive

(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the

terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the

vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-

fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not

use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner

should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer

at the start of each warm season. This service should

include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance

test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this

time.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the

system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,

for further warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced technician.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning

system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-

tioning components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-

carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-

ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning

service be performed by authorized dealer or other

service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is

running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or

ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and

the blower operating, the blower can contact hands

and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,

resulting in personal injury.

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind

the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure

to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.

502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and

lower the door.

3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter

cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of

the housing.

6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter

pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter

cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the

cover.

CAUTION!

The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to

indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure

to properly install the filter will result in the need to

replace it more often.

7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.

A/C Air Filter Replacement

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,

tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should

be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,

such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy

operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to

the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned

should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after

lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.

Particular attention should also be given to hood latching

components to ensure proper function. When performing

other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-

nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small

amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock

Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a

mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-

tions of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use

washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from

the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with

petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-

ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor

performance of blades may be present with chattering,

marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions

are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-

sary.

504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Adding Washer Fluid

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine

compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at

regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield

washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some

washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe

clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system

in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This

rating information can be found on most washer fluid

containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

must be exercised when filling or working around

the washer solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;

or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;

or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-

haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-

aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams

or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505

exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious

and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing

CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further

information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park

over materials that can burn. Such materials might

be grass or leaves coming into contact with your

exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-

hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-

tact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-

leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the

effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control

device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-

mance and cause serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

In the event of engine malfunction, particularly

involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of

performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and

vehicle.

506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-

verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-

portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure

proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst

damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop

the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-

tions, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-

age:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires

disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic

testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough

idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507

Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-

connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition

switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature

controlled and can start at any time the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had

time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system

pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12

months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,

flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-

freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any

accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently

spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the

face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-

ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection

at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for

leaks.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead

to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system please contact your

local authorized dealer.

508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains

visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and

flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to

MS.90032).

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine

damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-

ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling

system in an emergency, the cooling system will

need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-

thorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the engine coolant and may

plug the radiator.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509

CAUTION! (Continued)

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-

lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-

ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000

miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-

ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-

ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic

Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)

that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-

terial Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant

that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-

tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F

(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized

dealer for assistance.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-

ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water

will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the

engine cooling system.

510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper

level of protection against freezing according to the

temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is

operated.

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could

lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system, please contact your

local authorized dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-

mended and can result in cooling system damage. If

HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,

have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as

possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant

recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

•

The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the

cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.

Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the

engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the

cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres-

sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent

scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap

while the system is hot or under pressure.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-

gine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is

a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check

with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-

mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based

engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in

puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek

emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground

spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for

determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the

engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera-

ture, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the

bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines

shown on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for

the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant

(antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As

long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,

the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

maintain the proper level, it should be added to the

coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming

from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-

mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in

the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-

freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant

expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-

ing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are

required, the cooling system should be pressure tested

for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a

minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to

MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion

protection of your engine which contains aluminum

components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow

hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

•

Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY

the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in

unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,

poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or

riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked

when performing under hood services, or immediately if

the brake system warning light is on.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before

removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the

fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake

fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the

brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked

when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level

may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual

transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to

both the brake system and the clutch release system. The

two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in

one system will not affect the other system. The manual

transmission clutch release system should not require

fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the

brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does

not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a

result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See

your local authorized dealer for service.

514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-

fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-

taining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid

can severely damage your brake system and/or

impair its performance. The proper type of brake

fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the

original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder

reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has

been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake

fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the

air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may

cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-

longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing

the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also

damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be

taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate

the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be

damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515

CAUTION!

Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch

system performance. Improper brake fluids may dam-

age the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch func-

tion and the ability to shift the transmission.

Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) — If

Equipped

Selection Of Lubricant (Six-Speed Transmission)

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure

optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the

manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids,

Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid

specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission

fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.

No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;

only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-

turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration

in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter

shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using

any special additives in the transmission.

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered

product and its performance may be impaired by supple-

mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-

tives to the transmission. The only exception to this

policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid

leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may

adversely affect seals.

516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as

the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not

require adjustment under normal operating conditions.

Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the

transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is

provided. Your authorized dealer can check your trans-

mission fluid level using special service tools. If you

notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit

you authorized dealer immediately to have the fluid level

checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid

level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-

rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-

age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper

tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at

the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the

life of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is frequently

driven on rough or unpaved roads, on mountain roads,

on short trips, or in heavy city traffic during hot weather,

or is used for frequent trailer towing, police, fleet, taxi,

etc., change the fluid as indicated in the Maintenance

Schedule. In addition, change the fluid and filter if the

fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the

transmission is disassembled for any reason.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517

Automatic Transmission (CVT) — If Equipped

Selection Of Lubricant (CVT)

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to

ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use

only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid

which has the special friction coefficient additives neces-

sary for proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven

pulleys. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts”

in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to

maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using

the recommended fluid.

No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;

only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-

turer’s recommended fluid may cause belt slip and

result in a complete transmission failure! Refer to

“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this sec-

tion for fluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using

any special additives in the transmission.

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered

product and its performance may be impaired by supple-

mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-

tives to the transmission. The only exception to this

policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid

leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may

adversely affect seals.

518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as

the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not

require adjustment under normal operating conditions.

Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the

transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is

provided. Your authorized dealer can check your trans-

mission fluid level using special service tools. If you

notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit

your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans-

mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with

an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission

damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-

rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-

age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper

tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Refer to the ⬙Maintenance Schedule⬙ for the proper

maintenance intervals. In addition, change the fluid and

filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.),

or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519

Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid

level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a

point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom

of the hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Please see your authorized dealer for service.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at

the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of

the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-

cant has become contaminated with water.

NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be

changed immediately.

Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) — AWD/4WD Models

Only

Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Fluid Level Check

Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If

leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the

fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between

the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the

fill hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) — AWD/4WD Models

Only

Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer

to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-

ing Your Vehicle” for further information.

Fluid Level Check

Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If

leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the

fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between

the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the

fill hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on

trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly

corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,

which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will

have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-

body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable

you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-

hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with

clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-

lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug

and Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR

Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect

your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder that will

scratch metal and painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi

(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint

and decals.

522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once

a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and

open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is

considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar

cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,

have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The

cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of

the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well

packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as

possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to

match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly

with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use

MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or

Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,

abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-

nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov-

ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY

MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used

on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain

this finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,

or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These

products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.

Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions

or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-

tective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or

equivalent is recommended.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If

Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-

ner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting

with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild

soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.

Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use

a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of

protectants on Stain Repel products.

524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Care

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and

carpeting.

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for

leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt

can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth

and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid

soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please

do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather

upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not

required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

CAUTION!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,

suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,

painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may

cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

CAUTION!

Damage caused by these type of products may not be

covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton

based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as

damage to the seat may result.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and

less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-

lowed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial

household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-

dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows

equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or

other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the

towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner

directly on the mirror.

Instrument Panel Cover

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which

minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use

protectants or other products which may cause undesir-

able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the

low glare surface.

526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Instrument Panel Bezels

CAUTION!

When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-

hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.

Some air fresheners will damage the finish of

painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly

contact any surface.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may

be used, but do not use high alcohol content or

abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a

clean damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild

soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the

belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527

WARNING! (Continued)

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not

disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies

must be replaced after a collision if they have been

damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

FUSES

WARNING!

•

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-

priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as

the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another

fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown

fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure

to use proper fuses may result in serious personal

injury, fire and/or property damage.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition

is off and that all the other services are switched off

and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-

rized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air

bag system, braking system), power unit systems

(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system

blows, contact an authorized dealer.

528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Integrated Power Module (IPM)

The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine

compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center

contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that

identifies each component may be printed on the inside

of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Main-

taining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

1 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow – If Equipped

2 – 15 Amp Lt Blue AWD/4WD Control Mod-

ule – If Equipped

3 – 10 Amp Red Rear Center Brake Light

Integrated Power Module

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

Switch

4 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch/Clock

Spring

5 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Battery Feed For Power

Tech

6 – 10 Amp Red Power Mirror/Steering

Control Satellite Radio/

Hands-Free Phone

7 – 30 Amp Green Ignition Off Draw

8 – 30 Amp Green Ignition Off Draw

9 40 Amp Green – Power Seats

10 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Locks/Interior

Lighting

11 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Outlet

12 – 20 Amp Yellow 115V AC Inverter – If

Equipped

530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

13 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter

14 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Cluster

15 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan

16 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Dome Lamp/Sunroof/

Rear Wiper Motor

17 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module

18 40 Amp Green – Auto Shutdown Relay

19 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio Amplifiers

20 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Radio

21 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren –

If Equipped

22 – 10 Amp Red Heating, AC/Compass

23 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Auto Shutdown Relay

24 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Sunroof – If

Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

25 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror – If

Equipped

26 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Auto Shutdown Relay

27 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module

28 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module/

Occupant Classification

Module

29 – – Hot Vehicle (No Fuse Re-

quired)

30 – 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seat – If

Equipped

31 – 10 Amp Red Headlamp Washer – If

Equipped

32 30 Amp Pink – Auto Shutdown Relay

33 – 10 Amp Red J1962 Conn/Powertrain

Control Module

532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

34 30 Amp Pink – Antilock BrakeValve

35 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brake Pump

36 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp/Washer

Control/Smart Glass – If

Equipped

37 – 25 Amp Clear Diesel Heater and H2/

MOD power top

CAUTION!

• When installing the IPM cover, it is important to

ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully

latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into

the IPM, and possibly result in an electrical system

failure.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use

only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The

use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may

result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If

a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates

a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21

days, you may want to take steps to preserve your

battery.

• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution

Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).

• Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of

service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes

in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will

ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the

possibility of compressor damage when the system is

started again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Front Header Lamp T578

Center Dome Lamp T578

Rear Cargo Lamp/Flashlight 8–A35LFAA

534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Low Beam/High Beam Headlamp H13

Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lamp 3757KA

Front Fog Lamp PSX24W

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED Assembly (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

Rear Tail/Turn/Stop Lamp 3157

Backup Lamp W16W (921)

License Lamp W5W

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-

spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric

conditions change to allow the condensation to change

back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually

accelerate the clearing process.

Headlamps

1. Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the

headlamp.

2. Reach into the engine compartment and pull the red

lock out at the green connector.

3. Remove green connector from back of bulb by pulling

straight back.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535

4. Twist the bulb to the left.

5. Pull bulb outward from assembly.

NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch

the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers

could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb

life.

Fog Lamps

1. Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout.

2. Remove electrical connector from bulb.

3. Remove bulb from housing.

Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp

1. Remove the two push-pins from the taillamp housing.

2. Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the

lamp from the aperture panel.

3. Twist and remove socket from lamp.

4. Remove bulb from socket and replace.

Taillamp Push-Pins

536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

License Lamps

1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the

snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.

2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

3. Pull bulb from socket.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer

for replacement.

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate) 13.6 Gallons 51 Liters

Engine Oil with Filter

2.0L and 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters

Cooling System *

2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine

Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equiva-

lent)

7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of

FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20

Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material

Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell

Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE

grade.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or

equivalent.

Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.

538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine

damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-

ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling

system in an emergency, the cooling system will

need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-

thorized dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and

may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission (CVT) — If Equipped Use only MOPAR CVTF+4 Continuously Variable

Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the

correct fluid may affect the function or performance of

your transmission.

Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) — If Equipped Use only MOPAR SP-IV M Automatic Transmission

Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may

affect the function or performance of your transmission.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic

Transmission Fluid.

Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) We recommend you use MOPAR Gear & Axle Lubricant

SAE 80W-90 API GL 5.

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) We recommend you use MOPAR Gear & Axle Lubricant

SAE 80W-90 API GL 5.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703

should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not

540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid

+4, MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ..............544 ▫ Maintenance Chart.....................547

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change

indicator system. The oil change indicator system will

remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for

scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change

indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-

vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions

such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or

cold ambient temperatures will influence when the

“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is

displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the

change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles

(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as

soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-

played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,

indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash

in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime

will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator

message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a

scheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

referring to the steps described under “Instrument Clus-

ter Descriptions” or “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-

ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

544 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle

is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is

operated predominately at idle or only very low engine

RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe

Duty.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level

• Check windshield washer fluid level

• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual

wear or damage

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake

master cylinder, power steering and fill as needed

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 545

Required Maintenance Intervals.

Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following

page for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

• Change oil and filter.

• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-

lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator

system turns on.

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as

required.

• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses

and park brake.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

• Inspect engine cooling system protection and

hoses.

• Inspect exhaust system.

• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or

off-road conditions.

546 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance Chart

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following

pages for the required maintenance intervals.

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X

Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,

and replace if necessary.

XXX X X X X

Inspect brake linings, replace if necessary. Check

park brake function, adjust if necessary.

XXX X X X X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 547

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X

Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X

Replace spark plugs** X X X X X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years

or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes

first.

Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid. X X

Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid. X X

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if

using your vehicle for any of the following: police,

taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. (CVT only)

548 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.

(CVT only)

Change the automatic transmission fluid (six-speed

only) if you frequently drive: on rough or unpaved

roads, on mountain roads, on short trips, in heavy

city traffic during hot weather, or if you use the ve-

hicle for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Change the manual transmission fluid if using your

vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing,

heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (com-

mercial service), off-road, desert operation or more

than 50% of your driving is at sustained high

speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

XX X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 549

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,

yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you

have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-

hicle could result in a component malfunction and

effect vehicle handling and performance. This

could cause an accident.

550 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE .......................553

▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............553

▫ Prepare A List ........................553

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............553

䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............553

▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............554

▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........554

▫ In Mexico Contact .....................555

▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........555

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................555

▫ Service Contract ......................555

䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............557

䡵 MOPARPARTS ........................557

䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............557

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,

D.C. ...............................557

▫ In Canada...........................558

䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............558

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................559

▫ Treadwear...........................559

▫ Traction Grades .......................560

▫ Temperature Grades....................560

552 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have

the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the

specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your

vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental

vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it

is advisable to make these arrangements when you call

for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally

interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and

are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality

service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 553

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and

the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized

dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-

solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.

They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-

cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer

center.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-

ter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (877) 426-5337

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French

554 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Tel.: (787) 782-5757

Fax: (787) 782-3345

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-

cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer

center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the

manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require

assistance can use the special needs relay service offered

by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711

and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with

a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle

to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected

repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 555

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a

manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail

within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

have any questions about the service contract, call the

manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)

465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It

is not responsible for any service contract other than the

manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-

vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,

and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the

contract documents, and contact the person listed in

those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment

when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer

has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and

training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with

the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related

concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),

some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State

of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or

other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,

or other reproductive harm.

556 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC

warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR PARTS

MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are

available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-

mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle

operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could

cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the

manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your authorized

dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),

or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-

trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West

Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 557

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

should contact the Customer Service Department imme-

diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety

defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-

port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-

tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-

cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call

for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-

mation that students and professional technicians need in

diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-

ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A

complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,

and/or components is written in straightforward lan-

guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,

charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals

make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix

problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and

features. They show exactly how to find and correct

problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-

ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests

and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

558 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the

assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-

quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included

are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-

cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety

tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by

the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal

safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 559

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-

teristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,

and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on

wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all

passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

560 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 561

INDEX

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............510

Adding Fuel .............................427

Adding Washer Fluid ......................505

Additives, Fuel ...........................425

Adjust

Down ...............................150

Forward ..............................150

Rearward .............................150

Up .................................150

AirBag...............................60, 61

Advance Front Air Bag ....................62

Air Bag Operation .......................63

Air Bag Warning Light ....................71

Enhanced Accident Response ................71

Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................74

FrontAirBag...........................60

If A Deployment Occurs ...................69

Knee Impact Bolsters .....................64

Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............73

Side Air Bags ...........................64

Transporting Pets ........................96

Air Bag Deployment ........................60

Air Bag Light .......................71, 99, 221

Air Bag Maintenance .......................73

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .499

Air Conditioner Maintenance .................501

Air Conditioning..........................315

Air Conditioning Controls ...................315

Air Conditioning Filter ..................326, 502

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips...........325, 327

Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............501, 502

Air Conditioning System .............315, 319, 501

Air Pressure, Tires.........................399

Alarm (Security Alarm) .....................224

Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................18

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............8

Antenna, Satellite Radio .................276, 302

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............509, 537

564 INDEX

Capacities ............................537

Disposal ..............................512

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................372

Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................236

Appearance Care .........................521

Assistance Towing.........................126

Assist, Hill Start ..........................375

Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................108

Automatic Door Locks ....................32, 33

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........319

Automatic Transaxle ........................12

Fluid Level Check .......................519

Automatic Transmission...........339, 341, 516, 518

Autostick .............................353

Fluid And Filter Changes ..............517, 519

Fluid Level Check .......................517

Fluid Type .....................516, 518, 540

Gear Ranges .......................342, 349

Special Additives ....................516, 518

Autostick............................353, 355

Axle Fluid ..............................540

Battery .............................227, 500

Charging System Light ...................227

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........25

Belts, Seat ...............................99

Body Mechanism Lubrication .................504

B-Pillar Location ..........................393

Brake Assist System .......................375

Brake Fluid .............................540

Brake, Parking ...........................368

Brakes .................................371

Brake System .........................371, 514

Master Cylinder ........................514

Parking ..............................368

Warning Light .........................222

Brake/T

ransmission Interlock.................341

Bulb Replacement......................534, 535

INDEX 565

Bulbs, Light ..........................101, 534

Calibration, Compass ......................255

Camera, Rear ............................178

Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........537

Capacities, Fluid ..........................537

Caps, Filler

Fuel .................................427

Oil (Engine) ....................489, 490, 498

Power Steering .........................368

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................511

Carbon Monoxide Warning ................98, 426

Cargo Area Cover .........................201

Cargo Area Features .......................201

Cargo Compartment .......................201

Light ................................201

Luggage Carrier ........................208

Cargo Light .............................201

Cargo Load Floor .........................203

Cargo Tie-Downs .........................204

Car Washes .............................522

Cellular Phone ...........................112

Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............537

Chains, Tire .............................411

Changing A Flat Tire .......................452

Chart, Tire Sizing .........................388

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .493

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............97

Checks, Safety ............................97

Child Restraint ............................75

Child Restraints

Booster Seats ...........................80

Child Restraints .........................75

Child Seat Installation .....................93

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........89

Infants And Child Restraints ................78

Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint ....88

566 INDEX

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt ..................................90

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......82

Older Children And Child Restraints ..........78

Seating Positions ........................81

Child Safety Locks .........................34

Clean Air Gasoline ........................423

Cleaning

Wheels ...............................523

Climate Control ..........................315

Clock ...........................260, 280, 290

Clutch .................................514

Clutch Fluid .............................514

Coin Holder .............................200

Cold Weather Operation ....................335

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............314

Compact Spare Tire........................405

Compass ...............................243

Compass Calibration .......................255

Compass Variance.........................255

Connector

UCI.................................305

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........305

Console ................................200

Contract, Service ..........................555

Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................537

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........511

Cooling System...........................508

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............510

Coolant Level ......................508, 512

Disposal Of Used Coolant .................512

Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................508

Inspection ............................512

Points To Remember .....................513

Pressure Cap ..........................511

Radiator Cap ..........................511

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .........509, 538

Corrosion Protection .......................521

INDEX 567

Cupholders .............................200

Customer Assistance .......................553

Data Recorder, Event .......................74

Dealer Service............................495

Defroster, Rear Window.....................207

Defroster, Windshield ................99, 318, 323

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................171

Diagnostic System, Onboard .................491

Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................166

Dipsticks

Power Steering .........................368

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................512

Door Locks

Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ......34

Door Locks ............................29

KeyFob...............................29

Remote ...............................29

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................29

Door Locks, Automatic ......................32

Door Opener, Garage.......................180

Downshifting ............................339

Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................154

Driving ................................357

Off-Pavement ..........................358

Off-Road .............................358

Electrical Power Outlets.....................192

Electric Remote Mirrors .....................110

Electronic Brake Control System ...............372

Anti-Lock Brake System ..................372

Electronic Roll Mitigation .................384

Traction Control System ...................378

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........174

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............379

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........228

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......245

568 INDEX

Emergency, In Case Of

Jacking ...............................452

Jump Starting ..........................474

Towing ..............................481

Emission Control System Maintenance ..........493

Engine..............................489, 490

Air Cleaner ...........................499

Block Heater ..........................336

Break-In Recommendations .................96

Checking Oil Level ......................496

Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................508, 538

Cooling ..............................508

Exhaust Gas Caution ..................98, 426

Fuel Requirements ......................422

Jump Starting ..........................474

Oil ...........................496, 537, 538

Oil Filler Cap ...................489, 490, 498

Oil Filter .............................499

Oil Selection ...........................497

Oil Synthetic ..........................498

Overheating ...........................449

Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............71

Ethanol ................................423

Event Data Recorder ........................74

Exhaust Gas Caution ....................98, 426

Exhaust System ........................98, 505

Exterior Lights ...........................101

Filters

Air Cleaner ...........................499

Air Conditioning ....................326, 502

Engine Oil .........................499, 538

Engine Oil Disposal .....................499

Flashers

Hazard Warning ........................449

Turn Signal .....................101, 240, 536

Flooded Engine Starting ....................335

Fluid, Brake .............................540

INDEX 569

Fluid Capacities ..........................537

Fluid Leaks .............................101

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transaxle .....................519

Automatic Transmission ..................517

Cooling System .........................508

Power Steering .........................368

Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........538

Fog Lights ...........................164, 536

Folding Rear Seat .........................158

Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) ...................158

Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................449

Four Wheel Drive......................237, 357

Systems ..............................357

Four Wheel Drive Operation .................357

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................478

Fuel...................................422

Adding ..............................427

Additives .............................425

Capacity .............................537

Clean Air .............................423

Ethanol ..............................423

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................427

Gasoline ..............................422

Gauge ...............................237

Materials Added ........................425

Methanol .............................423

Octane Rating ......................422, 538

Requirements ..........................422

Tank Capacity ..........................537

Fueling ................................427

Fuses ..................................528

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........180, 187

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............427, 429, 492

Gasoline, Clean Air ........................423

Gasoline

(Fuel)........................422, 537

Gasoline, Reformulated .....................423

570 INDEX

Gauges

Fuel .................................237

Gear Ranges .........................342, 349

Gear Select Lever Override ..................480

General Information .......................142

Glass Cleaning ...........................526

Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................432

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..............430, 432

GVWR .................................430

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) ................112

Hazard Warning Flasher ....................449

Headlights ..............................535

Cleaning .............................526

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........166

On With Wipers .....................166, 172

Passing ..............................166

Replacing .............................535

Switch ...............................163

Head Restraints .......................154, 155

Heated Mirrors ...........................111

Heated Seats.............................150

Heater .................................315

Heater, Engine Block .......................336

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .166

Hill Descent Control ....................243, 385

Hill Start Assist...........................375

Hitches

Trailer Towing .........................434

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)..............180

Hood Release ............................160

Ignition .................................12

Key..................................12

Ignition Key Removal .......................12

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................15

Information Center, Vehicle ..................245

Inside Rearview Mirror .....................108

INDEX 571

Instrument Cluster..................225, 226, 240

Instrument Panel And Controls ...............214

Instrument Panel Cover .....................526

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............527

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ..............529

Interior Appearance Care....................525

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............171

Introduction ..............................4

iPod/USB/MP3 Control

Bluetooth Streaming Audio .............146, 311

Jacking Instructions........................454

Jack Location ............................453

Jack Operation ........................452, 454

Jump Starting ............................474

Key-In Reminder ..........................14

Keyless Entry System (Sedan) .................20

Key, Programming .........................17

Key, Replacement ..........................16

Keys ...................................12

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................15

Lane Change And Turn Signals ...............536

Lane Change Assist........................166

Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................44

Latches ................................101

Hood ................................160

Lead Free Gasoline ........................422

Leaks, Fluid .............................101

Life Of Tires .............................408

Liftgate (Sedan) ...........................38

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...............206

Light Bulbs ..........................101, 534

Lights ..............................101, 162

AirBag .........................71, 99, 221

Back-Up ..............................536

Brake Assist Warning ....................383

572 INDEX

Brake Warning .........................222

Bulb Replacement .......................535

Cargo ...............................201

Center Mounted Stop ....................537

Daytime Running .......................164

Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............162, 166

Engine Temperature Warning ...............225

Exterior ..............................101

Fog..............................164, 536

Four-Wheel Drive Indicator ................237

Hazard Warning Flasher ..................449

Headlights ............................163

Headlights On With Wipers .............166, 172

Headlight Switch .......................163

High Beam ............................166

High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............166

Instrument Cluster ......................163

License ..............................537

Lights On Reminder .....................164

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........229

Map Reading ..........................168

Park ................................241

Seat Belt Reminder ......................220

Security Alarm ......................19, 224

Service ...............................535

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............231

Traction Control ........................383

Turn Signal ..............101, 162, 165, 240, 536

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .225, 240

Loading Vehicle .......................429, 431

Capacities ............................431

Tires ................................393

Locks ..................................29

Automatic Door .........................32

Child Protection .........................34

Door .................................29

Power Door ............................31

Lubrication, Body .........................504

INDEX 573

Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ...................208

Lug Nuts ...............................450

Lumbar Support ..........................153

Maintenance Free Battery....................500

Maintenance Procedures ....................495

Maintenance Schedule ......................544

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .229, 493

Manual, Service ..........................558

Manual Transaxle

Fluid Level Check ...................520, 521

Lubricant Selection ......................521

Manual Transmission ...................336, 519

Fluid Level Check .......................520

Frequency Of Fluid Change ................520

Lubricant Selection ...............519, 520, 540

Map/Reading Lights .......................168

Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................514

Methanol ...............................423

Mini-Trip Computer .......................243

Mirrors ................................108

Automatic Dimming .....................108

Electric Powered ........................110

Exterior Folding ........................110

Heated ...............................111

Outside ..............................109

Rearview .............................108

Vanity ...............................111

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............8

Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................412

MOPAR Parts.........................494, 557

MTBE/ETBE ............................423

Multi-Function Control Lever .................162

New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................96

Occupant Restraints ........................40

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................422

574 INDEX

Oil Change Indicator .......................248

Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................248

Oil, Engine .......................496, 537, 538

Capacity .............................537

Change Interval ........................497

Checking .............................496

Disposal ..............................499

Filter .............................499, 538

Filter Disposal .........................499

Identification Logo ......................497

Materials Added To ......................498

Pressure Warning Light ...................224

Recommendation ....................497, 537

Synthetic .............................498

Viscosity .............................498

Oil Filter, Change .........................499

Oil Filter, Selection ........................499

Oil Pressure Light .........................224

Onboard Diagnostic System ..................491

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) .............180

Operating Precautions ......................491

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............5

Overheating, Engine .......................449

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........5,558

Paint Care ..............................521

Panic Alarm ..............................24

Parking Brake............................368

Passing Light ............................166

Personal Settings..........................251

Pets....................................96

Phone, Cellular ...........................112

Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) ................112

Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........394

Power

Door Locks ............................31

Mirrors ..............................110

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........192

INDEX 575

Steering ...........................367, 368

Sunroof ..............................189

Transfer Unit ..........................521

Windows ..............................35

Power Seats

Down ...............................150

Forward ..............................150

Rearward .............................150

Tilt .................................150

Up .................................150

Power Steering Fluid.......................540

Power Transfer Unit ....................521, 540

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............54

Preparation For Jacking .....................454

Pretensioners

Seat Belts ..............................54

Programmable Electronic Features .............251

Radial Ply Tires ..........................401

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........511

Radio Frequency

General Information ...................18, 26

Radio Operation.......................258, 314

Radio (Sound Systems) .....................258

Rear Axle (Differential) .....................520

Rear Camera ............................178

Rear Drive Assembly.......................520

Rear Liftgate (Sedan) .......................38

Rear Seat, Folding .........................158

Rearview Mirrors .........................108

Rear Window Defroster .....................207

Rear Window Features .....................206

Rear Wiper/Washer........................206

Recorder, Event Data .......................74

Recreational Towing .......................444

Reformulated Gasoline .....................423

Refrigerant ..............................502

Reminder, Seat Belt.........................42

576 INDEX

Remote Control

Door Locks ............................20

Security Alarm ..........................18

Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) .................20

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........312

Remote Starting System......................26

Replacement Bulbs ........................534

Replacement Keys .........................16

Replacement Parts.........................494

Replacement Tires .........................409

Reporting Safety Defects ....................557

Restraint, Head .......................154, 155

Restraints, Child...........................75

Retractable Cargo Area Cover ................201

Roll Over Warning ..........................4

Roof Type Carrier .........................208

Rotation, Tires............................411

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................99

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................101

Safety Defects, Reporting ....................557

Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................98

Safety Information, Tire .....................386

Safety Tips ...............................97

Satellite Radio Antenna..................276, 302

Schedule, Maintenance .....................544

Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......49

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........55

Energy Management Feature ................55

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................46

Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................44

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............48

Pregnant Women ........................54

Seat Belt Extender .......................53

Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................54

Seat Belt Reminder .......................42

Seat Belt Maintenance ......................527

INDEX 577

Seat Belt Reminder .........................42

Seat Belts .............................42, 99

Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................49

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........49

Child Restraint ..........................75

Extender ..............................53

Front Seat ........................42, 44, 46

Inspection .............................99

Operating Instructions ....................46

Pregnant Women ........................54

Pretensioners ...........................54

Rear Seat ..............................44

Reminder .............................220

Untwisting Procedure .....................48

Seats ...............................148, 150

Adjustment .....................148, 150, 151

Heated ...............................150

Lumbar Support ........................153

Rear Folding ..........................158

Rear Folding (Sedan) .....................158

Seatback Release ........................154

Tilting ...............................154

Security Alarm.........................18, 224

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............538

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................15

Sentry Key Programming ....................17

Sentry Key Replacement .....................16

Service Assistance .........................553

Service Contract ..........................555

Service Manuals ..........................558

Settings, Personal .........................251

Setting The Clock...................260, 280, 290

Shift Lever Override .......................480

Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission .............338

Shoulder Belts ............................44

Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ............326

Signals, Turn ......................101, 240, 536

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...................411

578 INDEX

Snow Tires ..............................403

Spare Tire.....................404, 405, 406, 453

Spark Plugs .............................538

Speed Control

Accel/Decel ...........................177

Cancel ...............................176

Resume ..............................176

Speed Control (Cruise Control)................174

Starting ................................333

Automatic Transmission ..................334

Cold Weather ..........................335

Engine Fails To Start .....................335

Manual Transmission ....................333

Remote ...............................26

Starting Procedures ........................333

Steering

Power ............................367, 368

Tilt Column ...........................173

Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............312

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .312

Storage ................................534

Storage Bin..............................198

Storage, Vehicle...........................325

Stuck, Freeing............................478

Sun Roof ...............................189

Sun Visor Extension........................111

Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........61

Synthetic Engine Oil .......................498

System, Remote Starting .....................26

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........319

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................204

Tilt

Down ...............................150

Up .................................150

Tilt Steering Column .......................173

Tire And Loading Information Placard .......393, 394

Tire Markings ............................386

INDEX 579

Tires.....................101, 398, 404, 405, 559

Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................408

Air Pressure ...........................398

Chains ...............................411

Changing .............................452

Compact Spare .........................405

General Information ...............398, 404, 405

High Speed ...........................401

Inflation Pressures .......................399

Jacking ...............................452

Life Of Tires ...........................408

Load Capacity ......................393, 394

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............412

Pressure Warning Light ...................231

Quality Grading ........................559

Radial ...............................401

Replacement ...........................409

Rotation ..............................411

Safety ............................386, 398

Sizes ................................388

Snow Tires ............................403

Spare Tire ...................404, 405, 406, 453

Spinning .............................407

Trailer Towing .........................439

Tread Wear Indicators ....................408

Tire Safety Information .....................386

Tire Service Kit . . . .463, 464, 465, 468, 469, 471, 472, 473

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................437

Towing ................................431

24-Hour Towing Assistance ................126

Disabled Vehicle ........................481

Guide ...............................436

Recreational ...........................444

Weight ...............................436

Towing Assistance.........................126

Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........444

raction Control ..........................378

Trailer Towing ...........................431

580 INDEX

Cooling System Tips .....................444

Hitches ..............................434

Minimum Requirements ..................438

Tips.................................442

Trailer And Tongue Weight ................437

Wiring ...............................441

Trailer Towing Guide.......................436

Trailer Weight............................436

Transaxle

Automatic .............................12

Transmission

Automatic ..................339, 341, 516, 518

Fluid .........................516, 518, 540

Manual ..............................336

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....180

Transporting Pets ..........................96

Tread Wear Indicators ......................408

Trip Computer ...........................243

Turn Signals ......................165, 240, 536

UCI Connector ...........................305

Uconnect

Advanced Phone Connectivity ..............129

Operation .............................114

Phone Call Features .....................121

Phone Features .........................124

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect

Phone ...............................131

Uconnect 130

Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode ........288

Operating Instructions CD Mode ............283

Operating Instructions Radio Mode .......279, 289

Playing MP3 Files .......................285

Uconnect 130 With Satellite Radio

Multimedia Satellite Radio .............274, 301

Operating Instructions CD Mode ............295

Operating Instructions Radio Mode ..........288

INDEX 581

Playing MP3 Files .......................297

Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) ................112

Understanding Your Instrument Panel...........214

Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................559

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .305

Universal Transmitter ......................180

Unleaded Gasoline ........................422

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................48

Vanity Mirrors ...........................111

Variance, Compass ........................255

Vehicle Certification Label ...................429

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............7

Vehicle Loading ....................394, 429, 431

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............8

Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........18

Vehicle Storage........................325, 534

Voice Command

Commands ............................144

System Operation .......................142

Voice Training .........................148

Voice Recognition System (VR) ................142

Warning, Roll Over .........................4

Warnings And Cautions ......................7

Warranty Information ......................557

Washer

Adding Fluid ..........................505

Washers, Windshield .......................171

Washing Vehicle ..........................522

Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................523

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................523

Wind Buffeting ...........................191

Window Fogging .........................326

Windows ................................35

Power ................................35

Windshield Defroster .................99, 318, 323

Windshield Washers ....................169, 171

582 INDEX

Windshield Wiper Blades....................504

Windshield Wipers ........................169

Wiper Blade Replacement ...................504

Wipers, Intermittent .......................171

INDEX 583

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle’s electronic systems.

First Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS

16MK74-126-AA

Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

16MK49-126-AC

Third Edition Rev. 1